JP5662966B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a variable display device that derives and displays a display result after starting variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, to which any of a plurality of types of accompanying information is added. When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a predetermined specific display result, the variable can be changed to either the first state advantageous to the player or the second state unfavorable to the player. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that changes a winning means to the first state.

  As a gaming machine, the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display device that derives and displays the display result after starting the variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified becomes a predetermined specific display result. In some cases, the variable winning means that can change to either the first state that is advantageous to the player or the second state that is disadvantageous to the player is changed to the first state.

  Such a gaming machine includes a first game state (so-called big hit) in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state for a predetermined period of time according to the display result of the variable display, and the variable winning means for the predetermined winning period. After the execution of either the second gaming state (so-called rushing big hit) that changes to the first state in at least one of the short period and the number of times less than the predetermined number of times, the gaming state can be changed more than the normal state. Some control is performed in a high-probability state (so-called probability variation state) in which the probability that the display result is a specific display result is improved. In such a gaming machine, after executing the third gaming state (so-called small hit) in which the variable winning means is changed in the same manner as the second gaming state, the gaming state before the variable winning means is changed to the first state. Control. Among the gaming machines that are controlled to the first gaming state, the second gaming state, and the third gaming state, an effect that becomes a specific effect mode after the second gaming state or the third gaming state (a so-called highly accurate suggesting effect is performed, so-called Some perform (latent state). Furthermore, when any of a plurality of accompanying information (characters, characters, etc.) is added to the identification information and the second gaming state and the third gaming state are obtained, a display result in which the accompanying information is a specific combination is derived and displayed. There is something to control.

  As a gaming machine that shifts to a latent state in which a high-impact suggestion effect is generated after occurrence of a sudden big hit or a small hit, as shown in Patent Document 1, expectation for a probable change by changing the small hit probability according to the gaming state / game history The thing which raised the interest of the game by changing the degree is known.

JP 2011-130863 A

  In the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, a plurality of small hit lottery tables must be prepared in order to change the small hit probability.

  The present invention has been made based on such a background, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that has a high interest in gaming and a small control burden.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present application can identify each of a plurality of types of accompanying information (for example, accompanying symbols) added to at least some types. Specific display result (for example, jackpot combination) in which the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display device that derives and displays the display result after starting variable display of various types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) is started Variable winning means (changeable to either a first state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player or a second state (for example, a normal state) unfavorable to the player) For example, a gaming machine that changes the special variable winning ball apparatus 20) to the first state (for example, an open state), and changes the variable winning means to the first state for a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds). First gaming state control means for controlling to a first gaming state (for example, 15 round big hit state) that performs a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) (for example, 15R non-probable big hit or 15R probable big hit in step S243 in FIG. 40) In response to the determination, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes steps S114 to S116 in the special symbol process of FIG. 37 and the variable winning means for a period shorter than the predetermined period. After executing the second gaming state (for example, 2R big hit state) that changes to the first state at least one of (for example, 0.5 seconds) and the number of times less than the predetermined number (for example, 2 times), the gaming state is changed to A high-probability state in which the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is improved as compared with the normal state (for example, a probability change state) Second gaming state control means to control (for example, in response to the fact that the big hit type is determined to be 2R probability change in step S243 of FIG. 40, the first probability variation state or the second probability variation state is started in step S313 of FIG. 44) And a third gaming state (for example, a small game state) in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state in at least one of a period shorter than the predetermined period and a number smaller than the predetermined number. After executing the winning state), the third game state control means for maintaining the gaming state before changing the variable winning means to the first state (for example, the variable display result is determined to be a small hit in step S245 in FIG. 40). 37, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 for executing steps S118 to S120 of FIG. 37, and the first game state. Prior decision means for deciding whether to control to the second gaming state, whether to control to the third gaming state, and whether to control to the third gaming state before deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display ( For example, the variable display result is determined to be a big hit or a small hit in steps S240 and S245 of the special symbol normal process of FIG. 40, and if it is determined to be a big hit, the big hit type is further determined in step S243. 560 and CPU 56), and when the pre-determining means determines to control to the second gaming state or the third gaming state, the accompanying information added to the identification information as a display result of the variable display is a specific combination ( for example, executable deriving display control means controls to derive display the display result as a combination) shown in D02 in FIG. 60 (e.g., stearyl in FIG. 50 In step S536, the same effect is produced in the effect control CPU 101) for determining the final stop symbol in which the accompanying symbol is a specific combination, and after being controlled in the second gaming state and after being controlled in the third gaming state. An effect state control means (for example, an effect control CPU 101 that executes an effect using the effect control pattern table for mode A (180A) of FIG. 32A) that controls to a specific effect state (for example, mode A) that becomes an aspect; And the production state control means may be controlled to the specific production state and not to be controlled after being controlled to the third gaming state when not being controlled to the specific production state. step proportion of controlling the specific effect state in response to the game history Ri Do different (e.g., the effect control CPU101 Figure 52 when it is controlled to the third gaming state S752 Te, the portion for determining whether to perform a mode transition to the mode A depending on the number of variations from the mode A transition Koatari trigger), the derived display control means, said pre-determining means the third When it is determined that the game state is to be controlled and the specific effect state is not controlled, a display result different from the display result in which the accompanying information added to the identification information is a specific combination is derived and displayed (for example, effect control) If the CPU 101 determines that the mode is not shifted to the mode A in the first mode transition setting process executed in step S531a of FIG. 50 at the time of a small hit, the final stop different from the stop symbol in which the accompanying symbol becomes a specific combination in step S536 The part that determines the design) .
According to such a structure, the ratio controlled to a specific production | presentation state can be varied according to a game log | history, without changing the ratio which determines whether it is set as the 3rd game state. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced with a small control burden.

(2) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present application can identify each of a plurality of predetermined types of accompanying information (for example, accompanying symbols) added to at least some types. Specific display result (for example, jackpot combination) in which the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display device that derives and displays the display result after starting variable display of various types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) is started Variable winning means (changeable to either a first state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player or a second state (for example, a normal state) unfavorable to the player) For example, in a gaming machine that changes the special variable winning ball apparatus 20) to the first state (for example, open state), the variable winning means is changed to the first state for a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds). First gaming state control means for controlling to a first gaming state (for example, 15 round big hit state) that performs a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) (for example, 15R non-probable big hit or 15R probable big hit in step S243 in FIG. 40) In response to the determination, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes steps S114 to S116 in the special symbol process of FIG. 37 and the variable winning means for a period shorter than the predetermined period. After executing the second gaming state (for example, 2R big hit state) for changing to the first state at least one of (for example, 0.5 seconds) and the number of times less than the predetermined number (for example, 2 times), the gaming state is changed to A high-probability state in which the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is improved as compared with the normal state (for example, a probability change state) Second gaming state control means to control (for example, in response to the fact that the big hit type is determined to be 2R probability change in step S243 of FIG. 40, the first probability variation state or the second probability variation state is started in step S313 of FIG. 44) And a third gaming state (for example, a small game state) in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state in at least one of a period shorter than the predetermined period and a number smaller than the predetermined number. After executing the winning state), the third game state control means for maintaining the gaming state before changing the variable winning means to the first state (for example, the variable display result is determined to be a small hit in step S245 in FIG. 40). 37, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 for executing steps S118 to S120 of FIG. 37, and the first game state. Prior decision means for deciding whether to control to the second gaming state, whether to control to the third gaming state, and whether to control to the third gaming state before deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display ( For example, the variable display result is determined to be a big hit or a small hit in steps S240 and S245 of the special symbol normal process of FIG. 40, and if it is determined to be a big hit, the big hit type is further determined in step S243. 560 and CPU 56), and when the pre-determining means determines to control to the second gaming state or the third gaming state, the accompanying information added to the identification information as a display result of the variable display is a specific combination ( for example, executable deriving display control means controls to derive display the display result as a combination) shown in D02 in FIG. 60 (e.g., stearyl in FIG. 50 In step S536, the same effect is produced in the effect control CPU 101) for determining the final stop symbol in which the accompanying symbol is a specific combination, and after being controlled in the second gaming state and after being controlled in the third gaming state. An effect state control means (for example, an effect control CPU 101 that executes an effect using the effect control pattern table for mode A (180A) of FIG. 32A) that controls to a specific effect state (for example, mode A) that becomes an aspect; And the production state control means may be controlled to the specific production state and not to be controlled after being controlled to the third gaming state when not being controlled to the specific production state. step proportion of controlling the specific effect state in response to game state is Ri Do different (e.g., the effect control CPU101 Figure 63 when it is controlled to the third gaming state S755 Te, part gaming state to determine whether to perform the mode transition to the mode A depending on whether the high probability mode), the derived display control means, said pre-determining means the third game state If the control is determined to be performed and the control is not performed in the specific effect state, a display result different from the display result in which the accompanying information added to the identification information is a specific combination is derived and displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 101). Is determined not to shift to mode A in the first mode transition setting process executed in step S531a of FIG. 50 at the time of a small hit, a final stop symbol different from the stop symbol in which the accompanying symbol is a specific combination is determined in step S536. (Determined part) .
According to such a structure, the ratio controlled to a specific production | presentation state can be varied according to a gaming state, without changing the ratio which determines whether it is set as the 3rd gaming state. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced with a small control burden.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2), when the pre-determining means determines to control to the third gaming state, a specific effect determination is performed to determine whether to control to the specific effect state. Means (for example, an effect control CPU 101 that determines whether or not to shift to mode A in the first mode transition setting process (FIG. 51, FIG. 52, or FIG. 63) executed in step S531a of FIG. 50). Further, the derivation display control means is a case where the predetermining means determines to control to the third gaming state, and when the specific effect determining means determines not to control to the specific effect state, Control for deriving and displaying a display result in which the accompanying information added to the identification information is a combination other than the specific combination is performed (for example, when the presentation control CPU 101 is in a small hit, step S5 in FIG. 50). Upon determining not to shift to the mode A in the first mode change setting processing executed by 1a, the portion determines the associated symbol is the last stop symbol be a combination other than the specific combination at step S536), it may be.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged due to the fact that the accompanying information becomes a specific combination but is not controlled to the specific performance state.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, from the determination that the pre-determining means controls to the third gaming state, the determination to control to the third gaming state May be performed at a high rate (see FIGS. 10 and 11).
According to such a configuration, the ratio controlled to the specific effect state can be widely changed without increasing the control burden. Therefore, the degree of freedom of production is high.

(5) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2), when the pre-determining means determines to control to the third gaming state, the specific effect for determining whether to control to the specific effect state Determination means (for example, an effect control CPU 101 that determines whether or not to shift to mode A in the first mode transition setting process (FIG. 51, FIG. 52, or FIG. 63) executed in step S531a of FIG. 50). The specific effect determining means is controlled to the specific effect state for a predetermined period (for example, within 30 fluctuations) after being controlled to the third gaming state and controlled to the specific effect state. (For example, when the number of changes from the mode A transition of the small hitting opportunity does not exceed 31 changes in step S752 in FIG. 52, the production control CPU 101 performs step S760. Part to skip), it may be used.
The player may be discouraged and the interest of the game may be reduced if it occurs repeatedly in a short period of time that is not controlled to a high probability state despite being controlled to a specific performance state. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows various chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a transition of production mode. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural examples, such as a main board (game control board). It is a block diagram showing circuit configuration examples such as an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a reach determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the small hit variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a non-reach fluctuation | variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a left-right output determination table. It is a figure which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a re-lottery effect execution determination table and a promotion effect execution determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the temporary stop symbol determination table before a re-lottery. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a pseudo | simulation continuous temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the stop symbol in the pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation etc. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a symbol fluctuation | variation control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a timing chart showing an example of the transmission operation of the effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game state storage process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st mode transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st mode transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production setting process during variable display. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a game history table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd mode transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a decoration symbol change completion. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a transition of effect mode by a small hit. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen displayed on an effect display apparatus in the case of a small hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a transition of presentation mode in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd mode transfer setting process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st mode transfer setting process in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a transition of the production mode by the small hit in 2nd Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (special symbols and decorative symbols) each of which can be identified, to which any of a plurality of predetermined types of accompanying information is added. After starting, the display result is derived and displayed, and when the display result becomes a predetermined specific display result (final winning symbol or final winning symbol of the big winning combination), it becomes a big hit gaming state and a special variable winning ball device It is a gaming machine that changes 20 to an open state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened twice, such as “2R probability variation big hit (surprise big hit)”, the display result of the variable display is specified more than the normal state. There is a case where control is performed to a high probability state in which the probability of a display result is improved. In addition, after changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in the same manner as in the case of 2R probability variable big hit like “small hit”, the game state before the “small hit” (the game state before the “small hit” is The normal state may be controlled to the normal state, and the high probability state may be controlled to the high probability state. Furthermore, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 may be controlled to a specific effect state (mode A) that is the same effect mode after being controlled to the open state at the 2R probability variation big hit and after being controlled to the open state at the small hit. is there. That is, in both cases of 2R probability variation big hit and small hit, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened twice and the production mode is controlled to the specific production state, so that the player can play the game in the specific production state. It is difficult to recognize whether the state is a normal state or a high probability state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first embodiment for determining whether or not the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to the specific effect state according to the “game history” when the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to the open state with a small hit. The pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment and the second embodiment for determining whether or not to control to the specific performance state according to the “game state” when the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to the open state with a small hit. Such pachinko machines are included. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be described first, and then the points different from the first embodiment will be described regarding the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment.

[1. Pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment]
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. A pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming machine frame (base frame) 2 and a gaming board (gauge board) 6 that is supported and fixed by the gaming machine frame 2 to form a gaming board surface. Has been. The game board 6 has a substantially circular game area 7 surrounded by guide rails. In this game area 7, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

  A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is provided on the lower surface of the gaming machine frame 2, and an excess ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 is provided below the hitting ball supply tray 3. A hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 is provided which is operated by the player to fire the hit ball. The game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the gaming machine frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body.

  A first special symbol display 8a is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 6 (lower left of the game area 7 in the example shown in FIG. 1), and a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. A second special symbol display 8b is provided on the lower right side of the region 7. Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol indicator 8a is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol indicator 8b is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  Both the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are formed in a square shape, for example. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, a number indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”), and the type may be different. May be different. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, “00” to “99”. Good.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has a decorative symbol display area for performing variable display of decorative symbols synchronized with the variable display of the first special diagram or the second special diagram. That is, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of decorative symbols. The decorative symbol display area includes, for example, a symbol display area that variably displays decorative symbols that are identification information for three decorations (for production), “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Among the symbol display areas, there are symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The positions of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, as the display areas to be the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, three areas may be provided to be bonded or separated, or to be able to be bonded and separated. The display operation in the effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG. When the variable display of the first special figure is executed on the first special symbol display 8a, the production control microcomputer 100 causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display. When the special symbol display 8b is executing variable display of the second special figure, the effect display is executed by the effect display device in accordance with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. . The number of symbol display areas for variably displaying decorative symbols is not limited to three. For example, a plurality of symbol display areas such as two, four, or nine may be displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Any arrangement may be used.

  In the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, an upper effect LED 85a, a middle effect LED 85b, and a lower effect LED 85c are provided on the right side. The upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c are, for example, effects in which a related display effect is executed in each re-variation period (including the first variation period) during a single variation period. ) Blinks when a predetermined production operation such as) is executed. A movable member 78 is provided on the left side. The movable member 78 is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86, and moves when the motor 86 rotates. For example, the movable member 78 operates when a re-variation effect or the like is executed. A vibration motor (not shown) that vibrates the mounting portion of each LED is provided in the vicinity of the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c. The lighting operation of the upper production LED 85a, the middle production LED 85b, and the lower production LED 85c, and the movement operation of the movable member 78 have a possibility that the variable symbol display result of the special symbol may be a “hit”, or the decorative symbol variable display mode. It may operate when a notice effect or the like for notifying that there is a possibility of “reach” is executed.

  Below the effect display device 9, there is provided a normal winning ball device that forms a first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13. The normal winning ball apparatus is composed of, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member, and always keeps the first start winning opening 13 in a certain open state. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Below the ordinary winning ball apparatus, an ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 15 that forms a second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is provided. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 15 includes an electric tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed by a solenoid 16 into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an enlarged open state that is a tilt position. ing. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15, when the solenoid 16 is in the OFF state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball is in a normally open state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole 14. . On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15, by the tilting control in which the movable wing piece is tilted when the solenoid 16 is in the on state, the game ball can easily enter the second start winning hole 14. Become. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening 14 even when in the normal open state, the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. May be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 15 may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port 14 by, for example, closing the second starting winning port 14 in the normally open state. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a.

  A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 13a. At this time, if the first reserved memory number as the number of effective start winning balls that entered the first start winning opening 13 is less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the first special symbol display 8 a A first start condition (also referred to as “first execution condition”) for executing a special figure game using one special figure is established. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 14a. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 13a and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 14a. May be the same number or different numbers. At this time, if the second reserved memory number as the number of effective start winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14 is less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the second special symbol display 8b A second start condition (also referred to as “second execution condition”) for executing a special figure game using two special figures is established.

  Here, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special game started earlier is being executed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, etc. When the start condition for starting the special figure game is not satisfied, the variable display is suspended. For example, when the first start condition is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first hold memory The number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. Further, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second holding memory is stored. The number is incremented by 1 and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started. When this is done, the second reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented). In this embodiment, the added value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  A special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is provided below the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate that is opened and closed by a solenoid 21, and forms a large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, when the solenoid 21 is in the off state, the opening / closing plate closes the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, the open / close plate opens the large winning opening when the solenoid 21 is on. The game ball that has entered the special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is detected by the count switch 23. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, there is provided a first attached symbol display 9a for performing variable display of the first attached symbol which is identification information for decoration (for production) different from the decorative symbol. In the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, there is provided a second attached symbol display 9b that performs variable display of the second attached symbol that is identification information for decoration (for production) different from the decorative symbol. For example, each of the first attached symbol display 9a and the second attached symbol display 9b may be configured by two LEDs. In the first attached symbol display 9a, the variable display of the first attached symbol is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a. In the second attached symbol display 9b, the variable display of the second attached symbol is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The display operation in the first attached symbol display 9a and the second attached symbol display 9b is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 6 (on the right side of the game area 7 in the example shown in FIG. 1). The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). For example, the normal symbol display 10 only needs to perform variable display of the normal symbol by alternately lighting decorative lamps (or LEDs) indicating “◯” and “x”. Alternatively, the normal symbol display 10 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, etc., like the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, and the numbers indicating "0" to "9" A plurality of types of normal symbols composed of a symbol indicating “−” or the like may be variably displayed. Alternatively, the normal symbol display 10 may variably display the normal symbol by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order.

  On the side of the first attached symbol display 9a, a first special symbol reserved memory that displays the number of the first reserved memory that is updated based on the fact that a game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is specified. A display 18a is provided. On the side of the second attached symbol display 9b, a second special symbol reserved memory that displays the second reserved memory number that is updated based on the fact that a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 is identifiable. A display 18b is provided. For example, each of the first special symbol reserved memory number display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b may be a display composed of four decorative lamps (or LEDs). The first special symbol reserved memory number display 18a increases the number of lamps (or LEDs) that are turned on by 1 each time a game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 and the first start condition is satisfied. Each time variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lamps (or LEDs) to be lit is decreased by one. Further, in the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, every time a game ball wins the second start winning opening 14 and the second start condition is satisfied, the number of lamps (or LEDs) to be lit is increased by one. Thus, every time variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lamps (or LEDs) to be lit is decreased by one.

  The display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with a total reserved memory display unit 18c that displays the total reserved memory number, which is an added value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, in an identifiable manner. By displaying the total reserved memory number in the total reserved memory display unit 18c in an identifiable manner, it is possible to easily grasp the number of execution conditions (total number) in which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. . Note that the total reserved memory display unit 18c may not be provided as long as the first special symbol reserved memory indicator 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory indicator 18b are provided.

  On the upper part of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 is provided. For example, the normal symbol hold memory display 41 is a display composed of four decorative lamps (or LEDs), and displays the number of normal figure hold memories as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the gate 32. Here, when a game ball that has passed through the gate 32 is detected by the gate switch 32a, if the number of stored general symbols is less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the normal game by the normal symbol display 10 is used. The normal chart start condition for executing is established. If the general-game start condition for starting the general-purpose game is not satisfied due to the fact that the general-purpose game start condition is satisfied, but the general-purpose game started earlier is being executed, etc. Will occur. At this time, the number of stored common symbols is incremented by 1, and the number of lamps (or LEDs) that are lit on the normal symbol stored memory display 41 is increased by one. On the other hand, each time the normal symbol variable display by the normal symbol display 10 is started, the ordinary symbol hold memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the lamp (or LED) which is lit on the normal symbol hold memory display 41 ) Is reduced by one.

  A windmill and a number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided on the surface of the game board 6 in the game area 7. At predetermined positions in the game area 7 on the game board 6, winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39 serving as general winning holes are provided. For example, each winning port 29, 30, 33, 39 may be any one that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The game balls that have won the winning holes 29, 30, 33, and 39 are detected by the winning hole switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a provided corresponding to the respective winning holes. At this time, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 on the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part are provided outlets 26 through which the hit balls that have not been won are taken. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  At a predetermined position on the front side of the top surface of the hitting ball supply tray 3, an operation unit 38 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is installed. For example, the operation unit 38 may include a plurality of operation units such as a jog button that can be pressed and a jog dial that can be rotated.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a ball striking device for driving a driving motor in response to the player operating the ball striking operation handle 5, and using the rotational force of the driving motor to launch the game ball to the game area 7 (see FIG. Not shown). A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7.

  When the game ball that has entered the game area 7 passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display in a general game is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when lit). For example, the lower lamp is lit when the variable display ends. For example, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per symbol”. On the other hand, if the upper lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display on the normal symbol display 10, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol becomes "general map loss". When the normal symbol variable display result on the normal symbol display 10 is “per normal symbol”, the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 is tilt-controlled for a predetermined number of times, and the second start winning opening is obtained. 14 is in an expanded open state. In other words, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 changes the second start winning opening 14 from the normal open state, which is disadvantageous to the player, to the extended open state, which is advantageous for the player, when the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per game”. Let

  When a game ball that has entered the game area 7 wins the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, it is in a state where variable display of the first special figure can be started (for example, a special symbol). The first special symbol display 8a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol and the first attached symbol display 9a The variable display of the first attached symbol is started, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special figure, the first attached symbol, and the decorative symbol is executed based on a winning at the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special figure cannot be started, the first special figure is used by adding 1 to the first reserved memory number on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. The execution of the special figure game was suspended.

  If the game ball that has entered the game area 7 wins the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, the variable display of the second special figure can be started (for example, a special symbol). Variable display is completed and the second start condition is satisfied), variable display (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 8b, and at the second attached symbol display 9b The variable display of the second attached symbol is started, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special figure, the second attached symbol, and the decorative symbol is executed based on a winning at the second start winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special figure can be started, the second special figure is used by adding 1 to the second reserved memory number on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value. The execution of the special figure game was suspended.

  In the total hold storage display unit 18c of the effect display device 9, the display color is changed from the left to the right in order from the variable display game such as the special figure game in which the first start condition and the second start condition are established first. A plurality of display parts are provided. As an example, when the first start condition is satisfied, one of the display parts that are normally non-displayed (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the non-displayed display parts) is displayed in blue. To change. Further, when the second start condition is satisfied, one of the display parts that are normally not displayed is changed to red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, The display at the leftmost display part is removed and the display at each display part is moved leftward one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to non-display. Note that the total reserved memory display unit 18c is not limited to displaying the total reserved memory number so that the total reserved memory number can be specified by changing the display color, and the total reserved memory number can be specified by displaying the number of predetermined characters or displaying numbers. May be displayed.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b, after the special symbol variable display is started, when a predetermined time as the special symbol variable time elapses, the variable symbol variable display result The confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result, and it becomes “lost” if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round game advantageous to the player (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed a predetermined number of times. . Further, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit game state different from the big hit game state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the numbers indicating “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” are big hit symbols, the numbers indicating “2” are small hit symbols, A symbol indicating “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display 8a is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display 8b. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are 15 rounds. The jackpot symbol is a special symbol indicating the numbers “1” and “5”. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as the first specific gaming state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is played by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. A round is performed that changes to a first state that is advantageous to the user. In this way, the opening / closing plate that opened the grand prize opening during the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 6 and then closed the grand prize opening, thereby playing the special variable prize winning ball device 20 as a game. One round is completed by changing to a closed state, which is a second state that is disadvantageous to the user. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the open cycle of the big prize opening, is the first number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as the second specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is played in each round. The period for changing to the first state that is advantageous to the player (the period in which the big prize opening is opened by the opening / closing plate) is a second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state. . In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round is a second number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first number in the 15 round big hit state. In addition, in the two round big hit state, at least one of the period in which the big winning opening is opened in each round is the second period and the number of executions of the round is the second number is performed. Control other than that may be performed, and other control may be performed in the same manner as in the 15 round big hit state. A game in a round-two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, the predetermined winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in each round is changed from the second state that is disadvantageous to the player to the first state that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to return to the second state after a predetermined period (first period or second period) has elapsed.

  Out of the special symbols showing the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15 round big hit symbols, the 15 round big hit based on the special symbol showing the numbers “3” being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbols in the special game After the state is over, one of the special gaming states is a time-short state (“low probability”) in which the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened compared to the normal state (also referred to as “low probability low base state”). Also referred to as “high base state”. Here, the normal state is a game state other than a special game state such as a big hit game state or a special game state such as a short-time state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed) Thus, the same control as in the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on is performed. If the time-short state is terminated when any of the conditions of the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first, Good. In addition, after the 15 round big hit state based on the fact that the special symbol indicating the number “3” out of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, it does not become the short-time state. You may make it be in a normal state. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15 round jackpot symbol controlled to the short-time state or the normal state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is , 15R non-probable big hit symbol (also called 15R normal special figure).

  Out of the special symbols showing the numbers “3” and “7” that will be the 15-round jackpot symbol, the 15-round jackpot is based on the special symbol showing the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game. After the state is over, as one of the special gaming states different from the short-time state, for example, the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability variation control (probability variation control) continues. ) Is controlled to a first probability variation state (also referred to as “high probability high base state”) as a high probability gaming state. In the high-probability gaming state such as the first probability variation state, the probability that the variable display result becomes “big hit” and is further controlled to the big hit gaming state in the variable display of each special figure game or decoration pattern is higher than the normal state. Also improve to be higher. In this embodiment, such a high-probability gaming state is continued until the next variable display result is “big hit”, regardless of the number of executions of the special figure game. On the other hand, after entering the high-probability gaming state, one of the conditions is that a special-number game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the variable display result is “big hit”. You may make it complete | finish, when it establishes previously. In addition, even if a specific number of special figure games are executed in the high probability game state or before the variable display result is “big hit”, the high probability game state is generated at a predetermined rate when the special figure game is started. May be terminated. Alternatively, after the first probability variation state, when the special display game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) without the variable display result being “big hit”, the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is normally set. While returning to the variable display time similar to the state, the probability variation control may be continuously performed. Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15 round jackpot symbol controlled to the high probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is It is called a 15R probability variation big hit symbol (also called a 15R probability variation special figure).

  Two round big hits based on special symbols showing numbers "1" and "5" that are two round big hit symbols being stopped and displayed as confirmed special symbols in special figure games After the state is finished, the normal state is controlled. Like the special symbol indicating the number “1”, the two-round jackpot symbol controlled to the normal state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is not 2R. It is called a probable big hit symbol (also called 2R normal special symbol).

  Two round big hits based on the special symbols showing the numbers “1” and “5” which are the two round big hit symbols being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbols in the special figure game. After the state is over, as a special gaming state different from the short-time state or the first probability variation state, for example, the variable display time of the special symbol and the decoration symbol is the same as the normal state, but the probability variation control (probability variation is continued). Control) is controlled to the second probability variation state (also referred to as “high probability low base state”) as the high probability gaming state. Like the special symbol indicating the number “5”, the two round jackpot symbol controlled to the high probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is It is called 2R probability variation big hit symbol (also called 2R probability variation special figure). The first probability variation state and the second probability variation state are collectively referred to as a probability variation state.

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit game state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, a variable winning operation for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 to the first state advantageous to the player is performed as in the two round big hit state. That is, in the small hit game state, for example, the operation of opening the large winning opening for the second period by the opening / closing plate provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is repeatedly executed until the second number of times is reached. In the small hit gaming state, similarly to the two round big hit state, the period in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second period, and the number of executions of the operation in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second number. It may be controlled so that at least one of them is performed. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game with the variable display result of “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the big winning opening is opened by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit state. When the winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 20 in each round in the two round big hit state is changed to the first state, the same as the two round big hit state in the small hit gaming state. In the aspect, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the first certain change state and the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 10 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. The control for improving the probability that the variable display result of “per normal figure” is higher than that in the normal state, and the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball device 15 based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “per normal figure”. The second is to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 14 such as control for making the tilt control time for tilt control longer than in the normal state, and control for increasing the number of tilts compared to in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. In the first certain change state and the short time state, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. Thus, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 14 in the first certain change state or the short time state and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high release control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening 14 is in the expanded open state is increased as compared to when the high opening control is not performed. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period is the same as the period during which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either the first certain change state or the short-time state. That's fine.

  In this embodiment, in the second probability variation state, control is performed for determining the normal map variation time and the tilt control time at a different determination rate from that in the normal state. In this way, it is recognized to some extent whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the second certain variation state from the average usual figure variation time and tilt control time in a plurality of ordinary figure games. Can do. It should be noted that, in the second probability variation state, control may be performed in which the normal time fluctuation time and the tilt control time are determined at a time different from that in the normal state. In this case, it is possible to recognize whether the gaming state is the normal state or the second certain variation state from the normal fluctuation time and the tilt control time more reliably than when only the determination ratio is changed. Not only in these embodiments, but in the second probability variation state, the normal state is changed so that the normal variation time and the tilt control time are the same as those in the normal state and are determined at the same determination rate. It may be difficult to recognize whether the state is the second probability variation state.

  The variable display of the attached symbols by the first attached symbol display 9a and the second attached symbol display 9b is realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Anything is acceptable. Here, the variable display of the first attached symbol by the first attached symbol display 9a is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a. In addition, the variable display of the second attached symbol by the second attached symbol display 9b is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Synchronous means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. When the big special symbol or the small bonus symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the LED on the side reminding that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small bonus” on the first attached symbol display 9a. Remains lit. When the big special symbol or small bonus symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the LED on the side reminding that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small bonus” on the second attached symbol display 9b. Remains lit.

  As an example of the display result that reminds the user that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” in the attached symbol, it is sufficient if the upper LED is lit. On the other hand, as a display result of the attached symbol that reminds that the variable display result is “losing”, it is sufficient that the lower LED is lit. In the attached symbol, the display result that reminds that the variable display result is “big hit” may be different from the display result that reminds that the variable display result is “small hit”. . As an example, recall that the variable display result is “big hit” when the upper LED is lit, while the variable display result is “small hit” when both the upper and lower LEDs are lit. You may be reminded of something. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the function of the 1st attached symbol display 9a and the 2nd attached symbol display 9b with the effect display apparatus 9. FIG. That is, the first attached symbol and the second attached symbol may be controlled to be variably displayed as images on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  One of the special figure games using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b is started. Corresponding to the change of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle” and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R provided in the effect display device 9 (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction). ) Is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9, A finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese numerals). “One” to “Eight”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. It may be a decorative image showing a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types). In addition, any one of a plurality of types of accompanying symbols (also referred to as accompanying information) that can identify each is added to the decorative symbol. The accompanying symbol may be an image such as an alphabet, a symbol, or a character. Hereinafter, in the symbol display area 9L, the region for displaying the accompanying symbol is the accompanying region 9aL, in the symbol display area 9C, the region for displaying the accompanying symbol is the accompanying region 9aC, and in the symbol display area 9R, the region for displaying the accompanying symbol is attached. This is referred to as region 9aR.

  While the decorative symbols are changing, in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, the symbol numbers sequentially flow from the top to the bottom from the smallest to the largest. When such a scroll display is performed and the decorative symbol having the maximum symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the minimum symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R (for example, the “left” symbol display area 9L), the symbol number is scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol number. When the smallest decorative symbol is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed. The direction in which the scroll display is performed is not limited to the direction from the upper side to the lower side, for example, from the right side to the left side, from the left side to the right side, or from the lower side to the upper side. There may be.

  In the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R The variable display state of symbols may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which is not yet stopped when the decorative symbol stopped on the display screen of the effect display device 9 forms a part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R (for example, “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R) is predetermined. The remaining symbol display area (for example, “medium” symbol display area 9C) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating “7” alphanumeric characters) constituting the jackpot combination is stopped. In the display state in which the decorative symbols are fluctuating, or the decorative symbols are all or part of the jackpot combination in all or part of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. It is the display state which is fluctuating synchronously while configuring the part.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative symbol is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Or by changing the display mode of the background image or changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern, a presentation operation different from that before reaching the reach state may be executed. Such an effect operation such as a display of a character image, a change in the display mode of a background image, or a change in a variation pattern of a decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation on the display screen of the effect display device 9, but also the sound output operation by the speaker 27, the lighting operation (flashing operation) of the frame LED 28, and the like are the operation modes before reaching the reach state. May be included in different modes of operation. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability”).

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach production, the decorative display variable display state may become the reach state and the variable display result may be a “hit”. There may be a case where a variable display effect for notifying the player is given by a variable display mode of the symbol or the like. In this embodiment, a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect can be executed, and whether or not each effect operation is executed in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 31 side or the like. It is determined. The variable display effect in this embodiment is not particularly limited as long as the special figure change time changes depending on whether or not the corresponding effect operation is executed. For example, when the variable display effect is executed, it is only necessary that the variable symbol display time (special symbol change time) of the special symbol becomes longer than when the variable display effect is not executed.

  In the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, the symbol display of “left”, “middle”, and “right” is displayed based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special game is established once. After the decorative symbols are changed in all of the areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then all the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are displayed. It is possible to perform effect display for performing variable display again by changing the decorative design again (pseudo-variable) at a predetermined time (for example, up to three times). As an example, in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R have pseudo-repetition chance GC1 as shown in FIG. Any one of a plurality of predetermined combinations of non-specific display results such as GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the “left symbol” shown in FIG. 2A and the like is a decorative symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the “middle symbol” is “medium”. It is a decorative symbol displayed in the symbol display area 9C, and the “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, it is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing fluctuation display and changing the decorative symbol immediately after stopping for a short time. It is only necessary that the player can recognize that the decorative pattern is not fixed. Alternatively, in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the variable display result may be set so that the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the number of pseudo-continuous changes (re-changes) increases. Accordingly, the player can recognize that the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is performed by temporarily stopping display of any one of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8, and the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. Accordingly, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) once to three times. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative symbols has been started 2 to 4 times in succession. The number of executions of the variable display (including the initial fluctuation) by executing the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) once or a plurality of times in the “simulated continuous” variable display effect is also referred to as the total number of fluctuations of the pseudo continuous.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, a re-change effect such as a related display effect may be executed along with a plurality of change displays including the initial change. As an example, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, the ones that are lit among the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c increase one by one. It may be controlled so that the three LEDs blink after all the three LEDs are turned on. It should be noted that all LEDs (upper effect LED 85a, middle effect LED 85b, and lower effect LED 85c) may be in an extinguished state during a period (temporary stop period) in which any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is displayed. Further, during the period of re-variation (including the initial variation), the LED may be controlled so that the display color changes, or it is not controlled so that the number of lighted items increases one by one. You may make it control so that what is lit among effect LED85a, medium effect LED85b, and lower effect LED85c changes. As another example, the movable member 78 may be controlled to operate during the period of each variation display (including the initial variation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. As yet another example, the effect display device 9 may be controlled to display a specific character image during each variation display (including the first variation) by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. In addition to some or all of these re-variation effects, or in place of some or all of these re-change effects, one of LED lighting or blinking, operation of the movable member 78, and display of the character image. It may be controlled to execute a re-variation effect combining a part or all. Rather than the case where the re-variation effect is executed with only one type of effect mode, when the re-change effect that combines a plurality of types of effect modes is included, or when the re-change effect is performed multiple times May change, the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” and the possibility that the big hit type will be “15R probability change” may be increased.

  As a variable display effect different from the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, a “slip” variable display effect may be executed. In the variable display effect of “sliding”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and then two or more symbol display areas (for example, Decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R, or the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R). After that, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of symbol display areas (for example, “left” symbol display area 9L and “right” symbol display area 9R) of the symbol display areas temporarily displayed. (1) or (2), after changing the decorative design again, the stop display is performed, and the effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed. As an example, in the variable display effect of “slip”, any of the combinations of decorative symbols that result in non-specific display results, such as any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 as shown in FIG. Is done. After that, by changing the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R again, the final decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol is obtained. Derived and displayed. In this way, the variable display effect of “sliding” in which some decorative symbols are changed again after a combination of decorative symbols that give a predetermined non-specific display result such as any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily displayed. Is also referred to as a variable display effect of “slip after chance stop”. Note that the “slip” variable display effect is not limited to the one that derives and displays the final stop symbol. For example, after the “slip” variable display effect is executed, the decorative symbol that becomes one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 is displayed. The temporary stop display may be performed, and then the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be executed.

  Unlike variable reach effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-ream” or “slip” during decorative display of decorative symbols, for example, displaying effect images such as predetermined character images and message images. Notifying the player that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit” due to a presentation operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol. A notice effect may be executed. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the variable display state of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Anything that is executed (started) before reaching the reach state may be used. In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of notice effects such as “character display”, “step-up operation”, and “jog operation notice” are set to be executable. An effect operation that becomes a notice effect may be any action that does not cause a change in the variable symbol display time (special figure change time) depending on whether or not it is executed.

  In the “character display” notice effect, during the variable display of the decorative design, for example, an effect display for displaying a character image prepared in advance at a predetermined position on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed.

  In the notice effect of “step-up operation”, during the variable display of the decorative design, for example, by the effect display that switches and displays a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance in a predetermined order on the display screen of the effect display device 9. An effect operation may be performed in which the effect mode changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages. In the notice effect of “step-up operation”, after any one of a plurality of kinds of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without switching. Further, in the notice effect of “step-up operation”, during the variable display of the decorative design, for example, the effect mode is changed in a plurality of stages by the effect operation in which the movable member 78 is operated in a plurality of types of operation modes in a predetermined order (step Up) may be performed. In the notice effect of “step-up operation”, after the movable member 78 performs the effect operation in one kind of operation mode, the effect operation in the notice effect is terminated without switching to the effect operation of the second stage. There may be.

  As described above, the notice effect of the “step-up operation” is executed in response to one start prize (that one game ball has entered the first start prize port 13 or the second start prize port 14). This is a kind of notice effect that is executed during variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. In particular, the step-up notice effect in which the aspect of the notice (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) changes (steps up) in multiple stages. It is. In general, as the number of times of change (number of steps) increases, the reliability (possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit”) increases. Also, depending on the number of steps in the step-up notice effect or the effect mode at each step, it becomes “15R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, a specific reach effect is executed, “15R normal big hit ”To“ 15R probable big hit ”, at least one of them may be notified in advance. Further, the object to be notified may be changed according to the number of times of change (number of steps). For example, “reach determination” may be performed when going to the second step, “super reach confirmation” when going to the third step, and “big hit confirmation” going to the fourth step. As the change of the notice mode (step-up), different character images may be displayed in order, or the step-up may be performed by changing the shape or color of one character. May be. That is, it is only necessary to be able to recognize that the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as viewed from the player changes stepwise.

  In the notice effect of “jog operation notice”, for example, the display of the effect image on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed in response to the operation unit 38 being operated by the player during the variable display of the decorative symbols. Or, by changing the sound output from the speaker 27, the production operation is changed. As an example, in the notice effect of “jog operation notice”, a predetermined effect operation as an operation promotion effect is performed during variable display of decorative symbols. The operation promotion effect is obtained by, for example, displaying an effect image such as a character image or a message image prepared in advance at a predetermined position on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Any production operation that prompts the operation may be used.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is a 15R non-probable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be determined in the special symbol game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the decorative symbol variable display state Corresponding to having reached the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, for example, the symbol pattern that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9 is the fixed ornament symbol that is normally a big hit combination. ”To“ 8 ”, any one of the decorative symbols having the even numbers“ 2 ”,“ 4 ”,“ 6 ”,“ 8 ”is“ left ”,“ middle ”,“ right ” The symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”). Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a 15R non-probable big hit symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the fixed symbol of the normal big hit combination is stopped and displayed. The mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) of “15R uncertain change” (also referred to as “15R normal”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result of “15R uncertain change” becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the short time state. Become.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the 15R probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the decorative symbol variable display state is displayed. In response to reaching the reach state, a reach effect similar to the case where the jackpot type is “normal” is executed, or a reach effect different from the case where the jackpot type is “normal” is executed. After that, a definite decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination has, for example, a symbol number that is variably displayed in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9. ”To“ 8 ”, any one of the decorative symbols having the odd numbers“ 1 ”,“ 3 ”,“ 5 ”,“ 7 ”is“ left ”,“ middle ”,“ right ” The symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol becoming a 15R probability variable big hit symbol in the special figure game, after the reach effect is executed, the variable symbol display mode of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol of the probability variable big hit combination is stopped and displayed is: This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a big hit type) of “15R probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  When the 15R probability variable jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the fixed symbol pattern that is a normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the decorative symbol. In this way, even when the fixed decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, if the probability variable big winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special game, it is included in the variable display mode of “15R probability change”. . Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “15R probability change”, it is controlled to the 15th round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the first probability changed state. Become.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during variable display of a decorative symbol in which the confirmed decorative symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a probable variation jackpot combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are usually the big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” on the effect display device 9, For example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the same decorative symbols are made to change again, and the decorative symbol (probable variable symbol) that becomes a probable big hit combination, One of the decorative symbols (ordinary symbols) that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display) as a confirmed decorative symbol. Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “15R uncertain change”, as the re-lottery effect, the fixed ornament that becomes the normal big hit combination after re-changing the decorative pattern displayed temporarily stopped A change promotion promotion effect that derives and displays a symbol is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “15R probability change”, as the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped is re-variable, the probability change big hit combination is confirmed. The changing promotion success effect that stops displaying decorative symbols may be executed, or the changing promotion failure effect may be executed.

  After the definitive decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed, it is a notification effect as to whether or not to control to the high probability gaming state such as the first probability variation state in the period until the round 15 jackpot state ends. Promotion effect during the big hit may be executed. Here, the timing at which the jackpot promotion effect is executed may be a period before the first round in the 15 round jackpot state is started after the variable display result (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. In the 15 round big hit state, it may be a period during which any round is being executed, or in a 15 round big hit state, it may be a period from the end of any round to the start of the next round. It may be a period from the end of the last round in the 15 round big hit state to the start of the next variable display game. Alternatively, an effect operation corresponding to the promotion effect during the big hit may be performed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or decorative design after the end of the 15th round big hit state. The jackpot promotion effect executed after the final round in the 15 round jackpot state is sometimes referred to as “ending promotion effect” in particular.

  The jackpot promotion effect includes a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the gaming state becomes a high probability gaming state even though the confirmed decorative symbol is a normal jackpot combination, and a promotion that becomes a high probability gaming state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to notify that there is no. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decoration symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the decoration symbol is variablely displayed. May be notified so that the player can recognize the presence or absence of promotion to be in a high probability gaming state by displaying different effect images. When a jackpot promotion effect is executed in a 15-round jackpot state or the like based on the jackpot type of “15R uncertain change”, a jackpot promotion promotion failure effect is performed. On the other hand, when the jackpot promotion effect is executed in the 15 round jackpot state based on the jackpot type of “15R probability change”, the jackpot promotion promotion effect may be performed.

  When the special symbol indicating “1” or “5”, which becomes a big hit symbol for two rounds, is stopped and displayed as a final special symbol in the special game, or a special symbol indicating “2”, which is a small hit symbol. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state. For example, a plurality of types predetermined as the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 as shown in FIG. One of the combinations of confirmed decorative symbols (also called chance combination) is stopped and displayed. However, as will be described later, the “small hit” may be a combination other than the chance combination. In addition, when the confirmed decorative pattern is a chance combination, the accompanying graphic added to the decorative pattern to be stopped is a specific combination. In the present embodiment, the specific combination is a combination in which the accompanying symbol has a common feature that can be identified by the player. As an example of a combination having a common feature that can be identified by a player, when the accompanying symbol is an alphabet, a combination having the same character type (for example, “a” or “A” is displayed in the accompanying regions 9aL to 9aR, respectively) Combination), when the accompanying symbol is a character, a combination having the same character characteristics (for example, a female character is displayed on each of the accompanying symbols 9aL to 9aR), and the like. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a special symbol indicating the number “1” which is the 2R non-probable big hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols in which various confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is as follows: This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) of “2R non-probability change” (also referred to as “sudden normal jackpot”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. In response to the special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “5”, which is the 2R probability variation big hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is variable display. This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) of “2R probability variation” (also referred to as “sudden probability variation jackpot (surprise probability)”) when the result is “big hit”.

  In addition, when a special symbol that becomes a two-round big hit symbol or a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state, After a predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. In addition, when a special symbol that becomes a two-round big hit symbol or a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, and the chance to open twice You may make it the fixed decoration symbol used as the predetermined non-reach combination different from eyes TC1-TC4 stop-displaying.

  Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “2R non-probable change” or “2R positive change”, it is controlled to the 2 round big hit state. "Is controlled to the normal state, while" 2R probability variation "is controlled to the second probability variation state. After the variable display result becomes “small hit”, the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” continues after the variable winning operation is performed under the control of the small hit gaming state. However, if it is determined that the special game state is to be ended corresponding to the special game whose variable display result is “small hit”, the normal state is controlled after the small hit game state is ended. .

  If the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R non-probable change” or “2R positive change”, or if the variable display result is “small hit”, 2 during the variable display of the decorative symbol There are times when the performance before opening is performed. In the effect before opening twice, a predetermined effect operation is performed in response to being controlled to a two-round big hit state or a small hit game state. In addition, the pre-opening effect is not limited to an effect operation executed during variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, but can be varied in part or all of the period of two rounds of big hit state or small hit game state. An effect operation that is continuously performed from the display may be included. When the pre-opening effect is started, the decorative symbol that is variably displayed may be erased, and after the pre-opening effect is executed, the confirmed decorative symbol may not be derived and displayed. The “big hit” and “small hit” when the big hit type is “2R non-probable change” and “2R positive change” are collectively referred to as “per 2R”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment includes a plurality of effect modes having different effect modes in the effect display device 9 and the like. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a transition example of the effect mode. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3B, four effect modes of mode A, mode J, mode K, and mode N are provided. As shown in FIG. 3 (A), these effect modes include the current effect mode and the jackpot type when the big hit game state or the small hit game state is finished, or when the variable display of decorative symbols is started. It changes according to etc. In addition, in order to enhance a production effect, production modes other than these may be provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R probability variation”, the mode K is set after the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) ends. The production mode is set. That is, during the production mode of mode K, it is in the first certain change state (highly accurate high base state). In the effect mode of mode K, for example, an effect image notifying that the game state is a high probability game state such as “probability changing” is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and / or on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The player may be able to recognize a high-probability gaming state by, for example, making the display mode of the background image or decorative design different from the display mode in the other effect modes. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R uncertain change”, the mode J effect mode is set after the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) ends. In other words, the mode J is in the time-short state (low-accuracy base state) during the production mode. In the effect mode of mode J, for example, an effect image informing that the time is in a short state such as “short time” is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 and / or a background image on the display screen of the effect display device 9 Alternatively, the player may be able to recognize the short-time state by making the display mode of the decorative pattern different from the display mode in the other effect modes.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R probability change” or “2R non-probability change”, the mode A effect mode is set after the end of the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state). Further, when the variable display result is “small hit”, the mode A effect mode is set after the small hit gaming state ends. However, as will be described later, when the game history when controlled to the small hit game state in mode N satisfies a predetermined condition (less than 30 fluctuations from the mode A shift by the previous small hit), the mode is changed to mode A. Do not migrate. In this way, during the mode A production mode, the 2nd probability variation state (high probability low base state) may be based on the “2R probability variation” jackpot type, or the “2R non-probability variation” jackpot type. Based on this, there may be a normal state (low probability low base state). Also, based on the variable display result of “small hit”, normal state (low accuracy low base state), short time state (low accuracy high base state), first probability variation state (high accuracy high base state), second probability variation state (high It may be one of a certain low base state).

  In the case of the mode A effect mode, for example, a common effect is executed when controlled to a predetermined special game state in which probability variation control such as probability variation state is performed and when it is not controlled. It becomes impossible to specify whether or not it is controlled to (probability change state).

  When the decorative symbol variable display is started, if the mode A is the production mode, the variable number of decorative symbol display (also referred to as “fluctuation frequency”) after the mode transition to the mode A is a predetermined number (for example, 20) A determination is made as to whether or not it is equal to or greater than that, and if it is determined that the number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the mode is changed from mode A to mode N. However, in the case of high accuracy state in mode A, even if it is determined that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the mode transition to mode A is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, mode N is set to mode N. Not migrated. That is, when the state is highly accurate, the effect mode of mode A is easily maintained.

  Mode N is an effect mode that shifts from mode A or mode J. During the effect mode of mode N, the mode N is basically a normal game (low probability low base state). However, when the mode is changed from mode A, the low-accuracy base state may occur. In the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect mode is mode N. If the variable display result is not “big hit” in the mode J effect mode and the time-short state is completed, the mode N effect mode is set.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes various control boards such as a main board (game control board) 31, an effect control board 80, an audio output board 70, a lamp driver board 35, and a payout control board 37 as shown in FIG. Has been. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 77 that relays various control signals transmitted between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80. In addition, various boards such as a power supply board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board may be disposed on the back surface of the game board 6 or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 31 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 31 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch arranged at a predetermined position, an effect control board 80, and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 31 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b to perform the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 10 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 10. It also has a function to control. The main board 31 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 560, an input driver circuit 58 that takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 560, and the game control microcomputer 560. An output circuit 59 for transmitting the solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 16 and 21 is mounted.

  The effect control board 80 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 31, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 31 via the relay board 77, and produces the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, and the decoration. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering including the LED 25, the frame LED 28, and the like are mounted. That is, the effect control board 80 includes all or part of the display operation in the effect display device 9, all or part of the sound output operation from the speaker 27, and all or part of the on / off operation in the light emitter such as the decoration LED 25 and the frame LED 28. The function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation is provided.

  The sound output board 70 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 80, and is used to output sound from the speaker 27 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 80. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp driver board 35 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 80, and a light emitter such as a decoration LED 25 and a frame LED 28 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 80. A lamp driver circuit that performs on / off driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main board 31 receives detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a. The transmission wiring is connected. The gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are game media such as what are called sensors, for example. As long as it has an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a gaming ball as In addition to the wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, and the like, the main board 31 includes the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10. The special symbol hold memory display 18a, the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, the normal symbol hold memory display 41, and the like are connected to wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control. In addition, the main board 31 is equipped with an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer. May be.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 31 toward the effect control board 80 is relayed by the relay board 77. The main board 31 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to the relay board 77, for example, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 560, for example, as shown in FIG. The included output port 571 is connected. The output buffer circuit included in the output port 571 can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77, and the signal input from the relay board 77 to the main board 31 is possible. To prevent. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 80 or the relay board 77 side to the main board 31 side.

  For example, a transmission direction regulating circuit 74 as shown in FIG. 5 may be provided on the relay board 77 for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit 74 includes a diode having an anode connected to a main board connector corresponding to the main board 31 and a cathode connected to an effect control board connector corresponding to the effect control board 80, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit 74 can block the input of a signal from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77 and allow the signal to pass only in the direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. . Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 80 side to the main board 21 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit 74 is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 77, and an output buffer is provided between the game control microcomputer 560 and the main board side connector on the main board 31. By providing the output port 571 including a circuit, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 31 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electrical signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the display operation of the effect image on the effect display device 9, a sound control command used to control sound output from the speaker 27, a decoration LED 25, and a frame. A lamp control command used for controlling a lighting operation or the like in a light emitter such as the LED 28 is included. FIG. 6A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 6A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is constituted by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 6A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b. The command 81XXH is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the display screen of the effect display device 9 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  In this embodiment, the first and second change start commands and the change pattern designation command are prepared as separate effect control commands. On the other hand, the designation content indicating which of the first special figure and the second special figure is to be changed and the designated content of the fluctuation pattern are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a special symbol (first special figure or second special figure) that starts change and a change pattern is prepared. You may enable it to specify the special symbol and fluctuation pattern which become a fluctuation start. Here, when the special symbol and the variation pattern that start the variation can be specified by one effect control command, the special symbol (the first special feature that starts the variation) for one variation pattern. There are cases where it is necessary to prepare two types of effect control commands according to the figure or the second special figure). On the other hand, if an effect control command for designating a special symbol for starting variation and an effect control command for designating a variation pattern are prepared separately, two types of effect control commands corresponding to the special symbol for starting variation are prepared. And the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of variation patterns may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 6B, the variable display result is determined in advance as to whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is In the case of “hit”, the variable display mode (hits type) of the decorative pattern is “15R uncertain change”, “15R uncertain change”, “2R uncertain change”, or “2R probability change”. Correspondingly, different EXT data is set. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the big hit type is “15R uncertain change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the big hit type is “15R probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the big hit type is “2R uncertain change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the big hit type is “2R probability change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result notification command indicating a predetermined determination result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, you may comprise so that the fluctuation pattern shown by the fluctuation pattern designation | designated command and the variable display result shown by the variable display result notification command can be specified by one production | presentation control command. As an example, an effect in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a variation pattern and a variable display result (any one of “losing”, “big hit”, “small hit”, and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”). A control command may be prepared, and information that can specify the variation pattern and the variable display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands. Here, when the variation pattern and the variable display result are configured to be specified by a single effect control command, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display results for one variation pattern. You may need to provide control commands. On the other hand, if the production control command for designating the variation pattern and the production control command for notifying the variable display result are prepared separately, the number of production control commands corresponding to the number of types of the variation pattern and the variable display result are provided. The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 6 (C), the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 corresponds to the normal state, the short time state, the first and second certain change states, and the like. Different EXT data is set. More specifically, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command indicating that the gaming state is a normal state. The command 9501H is a second gaming state designation command indicating that the gaming state is a time saving state. Command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command indicating that the gaming state is the first certain change state. Command 9503H is a fourth gaming state designation command indicating that the gaming state is the second certain change state.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the corresponding relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening designation command that designates display of an effect image during a period in which the big winning opening is open in the big hit gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is used to designate display of an effect image (for example, an effect image in an interval between rounds) during a period in which the big prize opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. It is a specified command. In the special command during opening of the big prize opening and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state, or the big win in the 2 round big hit state or the variable winning operation. Different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of times the mouth is opened (for example, “1” or “2”). In the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, regardless of whether the big winning opening is in the open state or the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, Alternatively, a continuous performance operation may be executed from the start time of the small hit game state or from the start time of variable display of the decorative symbols to the end time of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the winning end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command or the winning start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. . In addition, when controlled to the two round big hit state and / or small hit game state, part or all of the hit start designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, and the winning end designation command are all Instead of being transmitted, the effect operation in the two round big hit state and / or the small hit game state may be executed by the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command.

  The command B001H is used to execute a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 formed by the normal winning ball apparatus. This is a first start port winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition is satisfied. The command B002H executes a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b, based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting prize opening 14 formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for satisfying is established.

  The command C0XXH is displayed between the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number so that the total reserved memory number can be specified on the total reserved memory display unit 18c provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count that is the total value. In response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, for example, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In the reserved memory count notification command, for example, the total number of stored data (for example, “1” to “8”) of the reserved data in the first special figure reserved storage section 151A and the second special figure reserved storage section 151B shown in FIG. Alternatively, different EXT data is set corresponding to the total number of start data stored in the start data storage unit 151C (for example, “1” to “8”). Thereby, on the side of the production control board 80, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 31 is received, and the first special drawing is received. The total number of stored hold data in the hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be specified.

  In this embodiment, the first and second start opening winning designation commands and the reserved memory number designation command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the notification content indicating which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied and the notification content of the total reserved storage number are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to the combination of the established start condition (the first start condition or the second start condition) and the total reserved memory number is prepared. The established start condition and the total number of reserved memories may be specified. Here, when it is possible to specify which one of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied by one effect control command together with the total reserved memory number, for example, the upper limit value of the total reserved memory number is “8”. ”, It is necessary to prepare a total of 16 types of effect control commands of 8 types corresponding to the case where the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. On the other hand, if an effect control command that can specify which of the first start condition and the second start condition is established and an effect control command that can specify the total number of reserved memories are prepared separately, the first It is only necessary to prepare a total of 10 types of effect control commands, that is, two types of effect control commands that can specify each of the start condition and the second start condition, and eight types of effect control commands that allow the total reserved memory number to be specified. The types of commands prepared in advance and the storage capacity of the command table can be reduced.

  The game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer. For example, as shown in FIG. 3, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like. 54, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 55 that provides a work area for game control, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 56 that performs control operations according to a program, an I / O (Input / Output port) 57, and a CPU 56 Comprises a random number circuit 503 that independently updates numerical data indicating random values. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 560, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 56 executing a program read from the ROM 54. At this time, the CPU 56 reads the fixed data from the ROM 54, the CPU 56 writes the various data to the RAM 55 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 56 stores the various data temporarily stored in the RAM 55. The CPU 56 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 560 via the I / O 57, and the CPU 56 goes outside the game control microcomputer 560 via the I / O 57. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed. The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 560 only needs to include the RAM 55 in addition to the CPU 56, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O 57 may be externally attached.

  In this way, in the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) will hereinafter execute (or perform processing). Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  On the main board 31, for example, a random number circuit 503 included in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 4 counts numerical data indicating various random numbers used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 31 side. As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, on the main board 31 side, a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2-1 for determining a jackpot type, and a random value MR2 for determining a reach 2. The numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern, and the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used.

  Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers. The random number circuit 503 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 56 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 503 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently from the CPU 56 by the random number circuit 503, and the other random number values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, MR4, MR5. The numerical data indicating suffices if the CPU 56 is updated by software using a random counter. Also, by executing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and arithmetic processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503, numerical data indicating all or part of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is obtained. It may be updated. The random number circuit 503 may be built in the game control microcomputer 560, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 560.

  The game control microcomputer 560 may have a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 (an ID number assigned to each product of the game control microcomputer 560) stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54. The numerical data obtained in this way is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”. The random number MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is “15R uncertain change”, “15R uncertain change”, “2R uncertain change”, which is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit”. , “2R probability variation”, a random number value used for determination, for example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”. The reach determination random number value MR2-2 is a random value used for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “lost”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “239”.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. Takes the value of The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random value MR4 is a value in the range of “1” to “251”. Take. The random value MR5 for determining the general-purpose display result is used for determining whether the variable display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per-normal” or “unusual for general-purpose”. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “201”. That is, the random number value MR5 for determining the normal game display result is a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter through the second start winning port 14 formed by the normal variable winning ball device 15 based on the variable display result in the normal game (normally open). The state is used to determine whether or not to change from a state) to a state in which a game ball can easily enter (expanded open state).

  FIG. 8 shows a decorative pattern variation pattern in this embodiment. FIG. 8A is prepared in advance corresponding to each of the cases where the variable display mode of the decorative design is “non-reach” and “reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”. The variation pattern of the decorated design made is illustrated. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. FIG. 8B illustrates a decorative pattern variation pattern prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Note that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display result of “big hit” or “small hit” is referred to as a hit fluctuation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, in this embodiment, as the non-reach variation pattern, variation pattern PA1-1 to variation pattern PA1-5, variation pattern PB1-1, variation pattern PB1-2, variation pattern PC1- 1. A variation pattern PC1-2 is prepared in advance. Further, as the reach variation pattern, a variation pattern PA2-1, a variation pattern PA2-2, a variation pattern PA3-1 to a variation pattern PA3-8 are prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 8B, in this embodiment, the variation pattern PA4-1, variation pattern PA4-2, variation pattern PA5- are shown as hit variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”. 1 to fluctuation pattern PA5-3 and fluctuation pattern PA6-1 to fluctuation pattern PA6-5 are prepared in advance. In addition, as a hit variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R non-probable change” or “2R accurate change”, or the variable display result is “small hit”, Patterns PF1-1 to PF1-6 are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern PF1-1 to variation pattern PF1-4 shown in FIG. 8B, after the pre-opening effect is finished twice, the confirmed decorative symbol is derived and displayed and stopped. On the other hand, in part or all of the variation patterns PF1-1 to PF1-4, the pre-release effect is performed twice after the second-release chances TC1 to TC4 and the like are temporarily stopped and displayed. Alternatively, when the pre-opening effect is executed twice, the display of the decorative design may be deleted so that the fixed decorative design is not derived and displayed.

  FIG. 9 shows the variation pattern types of decorative symbols in this embodiment. Each variation pattern shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B is included in at least one variation pattern type among the plurality of variation pattern types shown in FIG. That is, each variation pattern type may be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns classified based on, for example, an effect operation executed during variable display of decorative symbols.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-4, the variation pattern types CA1-4, and the variation pattern types correspond to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. CB1-1 to variation pattern type CB1-3 and variation pattern type CC1-1 to variation pattern type CC1-3 are prepared in advance. Further, variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 are prepared in advance as variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”.

  Fluctuation pattern types CA3-1 to CA3-4 are prepared in advance as variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R uncertain change” or “15R probability change”. ing. In addition, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R non-probable change” or “2R accurate change”, or if the variable display result is “small hit”, the change pattern type is Types CA4-1 to CA4-3 are prepared in advance. In addition, variation pattern types CA4-4 to CA4-6 are provided as variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R non-probability change” or “2R probability change”. Are prepared in advance. Each variation pattern type should just be comprised including the 1 or several variation pattern along each content. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the variation pattern type CA1-1, the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is not shortened in the normal state or the second certain variation state, and the variable pattern type CA1-1 is variable such as “pseudo-ream” or “sliding”. It is a variation pattern type of “no shortening (normal state / second probability variation state)” in which the display effect is not executed, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no shortening (normal state / second certain variation state)”. . In the variation pattern type CA1-2, the variable symbol display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “3” or “4” in the normal state or the second certain variation state. It is a variation pattern type of “hold 3 or 4 shortened (normal state / second probability variation state)” in which variable display effects such as “pseudo-ream” or “slip” are not executed, and “hold 3 or 4 shortened (normal state / 2nd variation state) ”is included in advance. In the variable pattern types CA1-3, the variable symbol display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is any one of “5” to “8” in the normal state or the second probability variation state. This is a variation pattern type of “hold 5-8 shortening (normal state / second probability variation state)” in which variable display effects such as “pseudo ream” and “slip” are not executed, and “hold 5-8 shortening ( Normal state / second probability variation state) ”is included in advance. The variation pattern types CA1-4 are “pseudo-continuous, chance-of-chance” in which a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” or “sliding” is executed when the variable display mode is “non-reach” in the normal state or the second probability variation state It is a variation pattern type of “slip after stop”, and includes a variation pattern that is associated in advance with “slide after stop of chance, chance eye stop”.

  In the variation pattern type CB1-1, in the first probability variation state, the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened compared to the normal state, but the shortening based on the total number of reserved memories is not performed. It is a variation pattern type of “no shortening (first probability variation state)” in which a variable display effect such as “slip” is not executed, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no shortening (first probability variation state)”. In the variation pattern type CB1-2, the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “2” to “8” in the first certain variation state, and “pseudo-continuous” Is a variation pattern type of “reserved 2 to 8 shortened (first probability variation state)” in which variable display effects such as “slip” are not executed, and corresponds in advance to “reserved 2 to 8 shortened (first probability variation state)” Includes attached variation patterns. The variation pattern type CB1-3 is a variation pattern type of “including pseudo-continuous (first probability variation state)” in which a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuity” may be executed during the variable display of decorative symbols in the first certain variation state. Yes, it includes a variation pattern that is associated in advance with “including quasi-continuous (first probability variation state)”.

  In the variable pattern type CC1-1, while the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened compared to the normal state in the short time state, the shortening based on the total reserved memory number is not performed, and “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” The variable pattern type is “no shortening (short time state)” in which variable display effects such as “no shortening (short time state)” are included, and includes a variation pattern previously associated with “no shortening (short time state)”. In the variable pattern type CC1-2, the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “2” to “8” in the short-time state, and “pseudo-continuous” and “ The variation pattern type of “hold 2 to 8 shortened (short time state)” in which variable display effects such as “slip” are not executed, and the fluctuation pattern previously associated with “hold 2 to 8 shortened (short time state)” Contains. The variation pattern type CC1-3 is a variation pattern type of “including pseudo-continuous (short-time state)” that may execute a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect during variable display of decorative symbols in the short-time state. It includes a variation pattern previously associated with “consecutively include (short-time state)”.

  The variation pattern type CA2-1 is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (lost)” in which a normal reach production (normal reach) is performed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “lost”. And includes a reach fluctuation pattern associated with “normal reach (losing)” in advance. The variation pattern type CA2-2 executes a reach effect predetermined as a super reach α among a plurality of types of super reach after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is “losing”. The variation pattern type of “super reach α (losing)” includes a reach variation pattern previously associated with “super reach α (losing)”. The variable pattern type CA2-3 is a super-reach β having a different aspect from the super-reach α among a plurality of types of super-reach after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is “losing”. As a variation pattern type of “super reach β (losing)” that executes a predetermined reach effect, and includes a reach variation pattern previously associated with “super reach β (losing)”. Compared to normal reach production such as normal reach, super reach α and super reach β are more likely to reach a “big hit” (reliability) after the appearance of the reach. . The variation pattern type CA2-4 is partially displayed after a combination of decorative symbols that is a predetermined non-specific display result such as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 when the variable display result is “losing” is temporarily stopped and displayed. A variable display effect of “slip after chance stop” is executed to change the decorative pattern of the game again, and when the variable display effect ends, the final decorative pattern of the reach lose combination is derived and displayed “slip after chance stop” , And includes a reach variation pattern previously associated with “slip after chance stop (losing)”.

  In the variation pattern type CA3-1, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and then the normal reach production (normal reach) is executed, and then the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is displayed. This is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (big hit)” to be derived and displayed, and includes a hit variation pattern associated with “normal reach (big hit)” in advance. In the variation pattern type CA3-2, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the reach display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and then the reach effect of the super reach α is executed, and then the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived. The variation pattern type of “super reach α (big hit)” to be displayed includes a hit variation pattern associated with “super reach α (big hit)” in advance. When the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type CA3-3 executes the reach effect of super reach β after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state, and then derives the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination It is a variation pattern type of “super reach β (big hit)” to be displayed, and includes a hit variation pattern previously associated with “super reach β (big hit)”. The variation pattern type CA3-4 is partially displayed after a combination of decorative symbols that give a predetermined non-specific display result such as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 when the variable display result is “big hit” is temporarily stopped. A variable display effect of "slip after chance eye stop" is executed to change the decorative pattern of the game again, and when the variable display effect ends, the final decorative pattern of the big hit combination is derived and displayed "slip after chance eye stop (big hit)" , And includes a hit fluctuation pattern that is associated in advance with “slip after chance stop (big hit)”.

  In the variation pattern type CA4-1, the definite decorative symbol that is one of the two chances of opening TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed without changing the decorative symbol variable display state in the reach state in the normal state or the second certain variation state. The variation pattern type of “second stop chance second stop (normal state / second certain variation state)”, and the hit variation pattern previously associated with “second chance release stop (normal state / second certain variation state)” Contains. In the variation pattern type CA4-2, in the first certain variation state, the fixed decoration symbol that becomes one of the second release chances TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed without changing the variable display state of the decoration symbol to the reach state. It is a variation pattern type of “chance stop (first probability variation state)”, and includes a hit variation pattern previously associated with “second chance release stop (first probability variation state)”. In the variation pattern type CA4-3, in the short-time state, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes one of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed without setting the variable display state of the decorative symbols in the reach state. It is a variation pattern type of “stop (short time state)”, and includes a hit variation pattern that is associated in advance with “second chance to stop open (short time state)”.

  The variation pattern type CA4-4 executes a reach effect such as super reach α after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbol in the reach state in the normal state or the second probability change state, and from the reach effect to the effect before opening twice. This is a variation pattern type of “reach loss at the time of opening twice (normal state / second probability change state)” in which the fixed decorative symbol that becomes the combination of reach loss is shifted and displayed. The probability variation state) ”is included in advance and the hit variation pattern is included. The variation pattern type CA4-5 performs a reach effect such as super reach α after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbol in the reach state in the first certain change state, and shifts from the reach effect to the effect before opening twice. This is a variation pattern type of “reach lose at the time of opening twice (first probability change state)” in which the fixed decorative symbol that becomes the reach lose combination is stopped and displayed, and is previously associated with “reach loss at the time of double release (first probability change state)”. Includes hit variation pattern. Fluctuation pattern type CA4-6 executes reach production such as super reach α after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbol to reach state in the short time state, and shifts from the reach production to the pre-opening production twice to reach loss combination This is a variation pattern type of “reach loss before opening twice (short-time state)” in which a fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and includes a variation pattern of hits previously associated with “reach loss before opening twice (short-time state)”. It is out.

  As described above, in the setting example of the variation pattern type shown in FIG. 9, first, the variation pattern type is classified into the non-reach variation pattern, the reach variation pattern, and the hit variation pattern. On the other hand, in the case of the non-reach variation pattern, the variable display time corresponds to the normal state, the second probability variation state, the first probability variation state, or the short time state, and the total number of stored storages. Change to include one or more change patterns classified according to whether it is shortened, whether or not variable display effects such as “pseudo ream” and “slip after chance stop” are executed, etc. Pattern type CA1-1 to variation pattern type CA1-4, variation pattern type CB1-1 to variation pattern type CB1-3, variation pattern type CC1-1 to variation pattern type CC1-3 are set. In addition, in the case of a reach variation pattern, whether the reach production is normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, whether or not the variable display effect of “slip after chance stop” is executed, etc. Each of the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-4 is set so that one or more variation patterns classified according to the above are included. Furthermore, in the case of a hit variation pattern, whether the variable display result corresponds to “big hit” or “small hit”, or whether the big hit type corresponds to “2R non-probability” or “2R probability change”. No, one or more fluctuations classified according to whether the reach production is normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, or whether the variable display production of “slip after chance stop” is executed Each of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-4 and variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-6 is set so that the pattern is included.

  Note that the configuration of the variation pattern type is not limited to that shown in FIG. 9, and may be any configuration in which each variation pattern is classified based on an arbitrary effect operation performed during variable display of decorative symbols. As an example, for reach fluctuation patterns and hit fluctuation patterns, depending on whether or not “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects are executed, and the number of times pseudo-variable execution is performed (excluding initial fluctuations) Each variation pattern type may be configured by the classified variation pattern. In this configuration example, for example, a variation pattern PA3-7 shown in FIG. 8A is used as a variation pattern type including a reach variation pattern and a hit variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is 3 (revariation 3 times) A variation pattern type including the variation pattern PA6-4 shown in FIG. 8B may be set.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 54 included in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 4 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 54 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 56 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 54 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 56 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 31 and a variation pattern for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of decorative symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of the symbol display result determination table stored in the ROM 54. In this embodiment, as the symbol display result determination table, a first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 10A, a second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. An ordinary map display result determination table 130C shown in FIG. 10 (C) is prepared in advance. The first special figure display result determination table 130A is a big hit with the variable display result as “big hit” before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game by the first special symbol display 8a. It is a table referred in order to determine whether to control to a gaming state based on the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination. The second special figure display result determination table 130B is a variable display of the special special symbol game that uses the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed. It is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state with the result as “big hit” based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. Before the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result in the general symbol game on the normal symbol display 10 is derived and displayed, the general symbol display result determination table 130C sets the variable display result as “per normal symbol” and receives the second start prize. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to perform tilting control that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the mouth 14 based on a random value MR5 for determining a normal display result.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the short-time state, the first probability variation state, or the second probability variation state Accordingly, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to one of the variable display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In this embodiment, the game is a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display 8a or a special game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 8b. Depending on whether there is a decision table, different decision values are assigned to variable display results. On the other hand, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may use a common determination table to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. Thereby, the data capacity memorize | stored in ROM54 can be reduced. Also, the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B may have different assignments of determination values to the “small hit” variable display result. As an example, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the number of determination values assigned to the variable display result of “small hits” may be smaller than that in the first special figure display result determination table 130A. . With such a setting, in the special figure game using the second special figure, the probability that the variable display result is “small hit” is reduced as compared with the special figure game using the first special figure. It is possible to suppress the decline of the game entertainment due to the occurrence of a delay in the game in the probability change state or the short time state.

  In the general map display result determination table 130C, the game display result determination table 130C is used for determining the general map display result according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a first certain variation state, a short time variation state or a second certain variation state. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR5 is assigned to a part of “usual chart # 1” to “# 4 per ordinary figure” and each ordinary figure display result of “usual figure losing”. The base map display result determination table 130C sets the base map change time to one of a plurality of types corresponding to each of “base map # 1” to “base map # 4” and “base map lose”. Setting start data or when the random value MR5 matches the determined value assigned to any of the usual map display results of “# 1 per common map” to “# 4 per common map”. 14 may include setting data for setting the time (opening time) and the number of times (opening times) for tilt control to make the game ball 14 easy to enter.

  In the setting of the general chart display result determination table 130C shown in FIG. 10C, the random value MR5 for determining the general chart display result is “1” corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the second probability variation state. When it is any one of ˜ “60”, it is determined that the result of the “standard map display” is “per standard map”. On the other hand, when the game state is the first certain change state or the short time state, when the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result is any one of “1” to “180”, It is determined that the result will be a normal display result of “winning”. As a result, the probability that the variable display result in the normal game is “per normal map” is higher in the first certain change state or the short time state than in the normal state or the second certain change state. It is possible to increase the frequency at which tilt control is performed so that the game winning ball enters the start winning opening 14 easily. In addition, when the game state is the first probability change state or the short time state, the normal map change time is “1 second” regardless of whether the normal map display result is “per normal map” or “normal map lose”, and the game state is the normal state. Or shorter than in the second probability variation state. As a result, when the first certain change state or the short time state is established, the execution time of the usual game is shorter than when the normal state or the second certain change state, and the game ball wins the second start winning opening 14. It is possible to increase the frequency at which tilt control is performed to make it easy. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the first probability variation state or the short time state, the opening time and the number of times of opening are “1.7 seconds × 3 times”, which is longer than when the gaming state is the normal state or the second probability variation state. Opened many times. Thereby, when it is in the 1st probability change state or the time-short state, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 14 than in the normal state or the second probability change state.

  In addition, in the setting of the general chart display result determination table 130C, depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the second probability variation state, the general charts from “1 per normal map” to “3 per general map” are displayed. Assignment of decision values to display results is different. In the setting example shown in FIG. 10C, when the gaming state is the normal state, if the random number value MR5 for determining the general chart display result is any one of “1” to “6”, “per standard chart # 1 When the game state is the second probability variation state, if the random number MR5 is any one of “1” to “30”, the “figure # 1” The display result is determined. As a result, the probability of being determined to be a normal map display result of “# 1 per normal map” is higher in the second probability variation state than in the normal state. In addition, in the setting example shown in FIG. 10C, when the game state is the normal state, the random number value MR5 for determining the general display result is any one of “7” to “18”. On the other hand, when the game state is the second probability variation state, the random number MR5 is any one of “31” to “54”, and “# 2 per map” is determined. Is determined as the normal map display result. As a result, the probability of being determined to be a normal map display result of “# 2 per normal map” is higher in the second probability variation state than in the normal state.

  And if it is decided to be one of the usual map display results of “# 1 per common map” to “# 3 per common map”, the normal map change time, open time and The combination of opening times is different. For example, if it is determined that the map display result is “# 2 per map”, the variable time of the map will be “5 seconds” and “# 1 per map” or “# 3 per map” will be displayed. It becomes shorter than “10 seconds”, which is the normal time fluctuation time when determined as a figure display result. In addition, when it is determined that the map display result is “# 1 per map”, the combination of the release time and the number of times of release is “1.5 seconds × 2 times”, and “# 2 per map” or “ It is released many times in a longer time than “0.3 seconds × 2 times”, which is a combination of the opening time and the number of times of opening when it is determined as the result of displaying the usual map “# 3”.

  Whether or not the gaming state is the normal state based on the combination of the normal figure change time, the opening time, and the number of opening times when the normal figure display result is “per normal figure” is set by the setting of the general figure display result determination table 130C. It can be recognized to some extent whether or not the state is surely changed. In the setting example shown in FIG. 10C, the second probability variation state is higher than the normal state because there is a higher probability of being determined to be a normal map display result of “# 1 per common map”. The time and number of times of opening (tilting control time) is likely to be many times in a long time, and the probability of being determined as a result of the normal map display of “# 2 per normal map” is high, so the normal map change time is short Is likely. Depending on whether it is the normal state or the second probability variation state, the determination ratio of the combination of the normal map change time, the open time, and the number of open times when the normal map display result is “per normal map” is varied. On the other hand, the possibility that the game ball may enter the second start winning opening 14 may be set to be the same regardless of whether the game ball is in the normal state or the second certain variation state. For example, when the second probability variation state is higher than the normal state, the probability of being determined as the normal figure display result of “# 1 per common figure” is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening (tilting control time) ) Increases the possibility of multiple times over a long period of time, while lowering the probability that the normal map change time will be shortened by lowering the probability of being determined as the “# 2 per map” By doing so, the ease of entering the game ball into the second start winning opening 14 is almost the same in both the normal state and the second certain variation state (compared to the short time state and the first certain variation state). You may make it become. In addition, depending on whether the game state is the normal state or the second probability variation state, the determination ratio of the base map change time when the base map display result is “base plan losing” may be varied. .

  FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 54. The jackpot type determination table 131 is based on the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” and it is determined to control the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “15R uncertain variation”, “15R uncertain variation”, “2R uncertain variation”, and “2R uncertain variation”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the value of the variation special figure designation buffer (variation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 19 is “1” or “2”. Accordingly, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit types of “15R non-probable”, “15R probable”, “2R non-probable”, and “2R probable”. It has been. Here, the variable special symbol designation buffer value becomes “1” when the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a is executed, and the second special symbol indicator 8b sets the second special symbol indicator 8b. It becomes “2” when the special figure game using the special figure is executed.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131, the table data indicating the determination values assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types is the result of determining whether to control to the 15 round jackpot state or the 2 round jackpot state, and the end of the jackpot gaming state Later, it becomes data for determination corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to control to the high probability gaming state. For example, the table data indicating the determination value assigned to the jackpot type of “15R uncertain change” or “15R probability change” corresponds to the determination result of controlling to the 15 round jackpot state, while “2R uncertain change” or The table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “2R probability variation” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result that the control is controlled to the two-round jackpot state. In addition, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the big hit type of “15R non-probability” or “2R non-probability” corresponds to the decision result that the high probability gaming state is not controlled, while “15R probability change” Or the table data which shows the decision value allocated to the big hit classification of "2R probability variation" has shown the decision result that it controls to a high probability gaming state. The jackpot type determination table 131 is a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type (for example, any one of “0” to “3”) as a value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer 155 (a jackpot type buffer value). Table data (setting data) may be included.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 11, the allocation of the determined value to each jackpot type differs depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. For example, for the big hit type of “15R uncertain change”, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a decision value in the range of “1” to “15” is assigned, while the fluctuation special figure designation When the buffer value is “2”, a determined value in the range of “1” to “35” is assigned. For the big hit type of “15R probability change”, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a decision value in the range of “16” to “40” is assigned, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is In the case of “2”, a determined value in the range of “36” to “95” is assigned. For the big hit type of “2R non-probable change”, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a determined value in the range of “41” to “60” is assigned, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value When “2” is “2”, no decision value is assigned. For the big hit type of “2R probability variation”, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a decision value in the range of “61” to “100” is assigned, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is In the case of “2”, a decision value in the range of “96” to “100” is assigned.

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 11, the variable display result is set to “big hit” based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b is satisfied. When it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state, it is not determined to set the gaming state to the normal state after controlling the big hit type to “2R uncertain change” and controlling to the two round big hit state. In addition, when it is determined to control the big hit gaming state based on the establishment of the second start condition, the big hit type is set to “2R probability change” at a lower decision ratio than when the first start condition is established, and the control is set to the two round big hit gaming state. Later, it is determined that the gaming state is changed to the second probability variation state. As a result, when it is easy for a game ball to enter the second start winning opening 14 in the first certain variation state or in a short time state, the big hit type becomes “2R non-probability” and almost no award ball is obtained. Can be prevented, or the big hit type is “2R probability variation” and the prize ball is hardly obtained and is controlled to the second probability variation state.

  Here, as shown in the first special figure display result determination table 130A of FIG. 10A, the value of the random number MR1 that is a big hit in the non-probable variation state is 8001 to 8190 (190 pieces), whereas Since the value of the random number MR1 that is a small hit is 30001 to 30300 (300 pieces), the small hit is more likely to occur than the big hit. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11, among the random numbers MR2-1 (100) for determining the jackpot type, the values of the random numbers MR2-1 that are 2R-probability are 81 to 100 (20) (variable special figure designation buffer value). Is 1). Therefore, when the special figure game using the first special figure is executed, the small hit is generated with a higher probability than the 2R probability variable big hit. In this way, by setting the probability of occurrence of a small hit higher than the probability of occurrence of a 2R probability variation big hit, the transition to mode A during the game is facilitated, and the player is in a highly accurate state. It is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing many opportunities for expectation.

  As shown in the second special figure display result determination table 130B in FIG. 10B, the value of the random number MR1 which is a big hit in the non-probable variation state is 8001 to 8190 (190 pieces), but small. The value of the random number MR1 to be won is 30001 to 30150 (150), but among the random numbers MR2-1 (100) for determining the big hit type as shown in FIG. The values are only 99 and 100 (two) (when the variable special figure designation buffer value is 2). Therefore, even when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed, the small hit is generated with a higher probability than the 2R probability variable big hit.

  FIG. 12 shows a configuration example of the reach determination table stored in the ROM 54. In this embodiment, reach determination tables 132A to 132C shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C are prepared in advance as reach determination tables. The reach determination tables 132A to 132C indicate whether or not to change the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbols to the reach state when the variable display result is determined to be “lost” (predetermined). -2 is a table referred to for determination based on -2. Each of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C is selected according to a table selection setting as shown in FIG. In other words, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is selected according to whether it is a normal state, a second probability variation state, a first probability variation state, or a short-time state. In each of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C, numerical values (determination values) compared with the reach determination random value MR2-2 are non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, and non-reach HB1. -2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2 determination result not reach, and reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 Assigned to the decision result.

  For example, in the setting of the reach determination table 132A shown in FIG. 12A, the value in the range of “1” to “204” is non-reach HA1-1 corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “0”. And a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is “1”, a value in the range of “1” to “217” that is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-2. Assigned. A value in the range of “1” to “220”, which is larger than the number of determined values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is “2”, Allocated to reach HA1-3. Corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “3” or “4”, “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-3. The determination value in the range is assigned to the non-reach HA1-4. Corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is any one of “5” to “8”, “1” to “1”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-4. A determination value in the range of “233” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-5. With such a setting, when the total number of reserved memories, which is the number of held special figure games, is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “3”), the variable display state of the decorative symbols is changed compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. The rate at which the decision to reach the reach state is made is low. If the average special symbol variation time in the non-reach variation pattern is set to be shorter than the average special symbol variation time in the reach variation pattern, the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. In some cases, the variation time of the average special symbol can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  FIG. 13 shows a configuration example of the big hit variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 54. In this embodiment, jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C are prepared in advance as jackpot variation pattern type determination tables. When the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C are determined (predetermined) to set the variable display result to “big hit”, the variation pattern type is determined for the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the jackpot type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the second probability variation state, the first probability variation state, or the short time state. That is, the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 133A is selected when in the normal state or the second probability variation state, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133B is selected when in the first certain variation state, and the big hit variation pattern type when in the short time state. The decision table 133C is selected.

  In each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “15R uncertain change”, “15R uncertain change”, “2R uncertain change”, or “2R probability change”. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for type determination is assigned to any one of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-4 and variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-6. It has been. In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, a determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type differs depending on which of the plurality of types of big hit types is determined. ing. For example, in the variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 13A used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the second probability variation state, whether the jackpot type is “15R non-probability variation” or “ Depending on whether it is “15R probability variation”, the assignment of the decision value to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-4 is different.

  Thus, the allocation of the decision value to each variation pattern type differs depending on the jackpot type. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type can be varied according to the determination result as to which of the multiple types of jackpot types. Note that the determined value may be assigned to a different variation pattern type depending on the jackpot type. For example, when the jackpot type is “15R uncertain change”, the determined value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-1, while when the jackpot type is “15R probability change”, the variation pattern type CA3-1 is assigned. The decision value may not be assigned to. As a result, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result as to whether the jackpot type is a plurality of types.

  When the big hit type is “2R non-probable” or “2R probable”, when the big hit type is “15R non-probable” or “15R probable” such as variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern CA4-6. The decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type to which the decision value is not assigned. Thus, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is controlled to the 2 round big hit gaming state according to “2R non-probable change” or “2R probable change”, the fluctuation is different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state. The pattern type can be determined.

  When the jackpot type is “15R non-probable change”, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 13A used when the gaming state is the normal state or the second probability change state, The big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. 13B used at a certain time and the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 133C shown in FIG. The assignment of the decision value to -1 to the variation pattern type CA3-4 is different. As described above, when the big hit type is determined to be “15R non-probable change”, “15R probable change”, “2R non-probable change”, or “2R probable change”, the big hit change pattern type selected according to the gaming state Determination table 133A (selected when in normal state or second probability variation state), big hit variation pattern type determination table 133B (selected when in first probability variation state), big hit variation pattern type determination table 133C (selected when in short time state) When the game state is the normal state or the second probability variation state, the first probability variation state, or the short time state, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type may be different. In this manner, the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  Note that the determined value may be assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the gaming state. For example, when the big hit type is “15R non-probable change”, the determined value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-1 in the normal state or the second probable state, while in the first probable state or the short-time state. If there is, the determined value may not be assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-1. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states. Further, depending on whether it is the normal state or the second probability variation state, the determination value may be assigned to different variation pattern types, or the assignment of the determination value to each variation pattern type may be different. Also good. Thereby, it can be recognized to some extent whether the gaming state is the normal state or the second certain variation state based on the difference of the determined variation pattern type, the determination ratio of the variation pattern type, and the like.

  FIG. 14 shows a configuration example of the small hit variation pattern type determination table 134 stored in the ROM 54. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 134 has a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined (predetermined) that the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In the small hit variation pattern type determination table 134, the game state is compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the second probability variation state, the first probability variation state, or the short time state. A numerical value (determined value) is assigned to one of the fluctuation pattern types CA4-1 to CA4-3.

  In the small hit variation pattern type determination table 134, the big hit variation shown in FIG. 13A is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 to which all of the determined values are assigned when the gaming state is the normal state or the second certain variation state. In the pattern type determination table 133A, a part of the determination value is assigned in accordance with the case where the big hit type is “2R non-probability change” or “2R probability change”. In the small hit variation pattern type determination table 134, the big hit variation pattern type determination shown in FIG. 13B is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-2 to which all of the determined values are assigned when the gaming state is the first certain variation state. In the table 133B, a part of the determined value is assigned in accordance with the case where the jackpot type is “2R uncertain change” or “2R probability change”. In the small hit variation pattern type determination table 134, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 133C shown in FIG. 13C is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-3 to which all of the determined values are assigned when the gaming state is the short-time state. In FIG. 4, a part of the decision value is assigned according to the case where the jackpot type is “2R uncertain change” or “2R probability change”. As described above, the variation pattern type CA4-1 to variation pattern type CA4-3 includes a case where the big hit type is “2R uncertain change” or “2R probability change” and a case where the variable display result is “small hit”. , Common variation pattern types. That is, in the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, the table data corresponding to the big hit type “2R uncertain change” or “2R probability change” and the table data constituting the small hit variation pattern type determination table 134 include: It is set to include a common variation pattern type.

  FIG. 15 shows a configuration example of the reach variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 54. In this embodiment, reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C are prepared in advance as reach variation pattern type determination tables. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when the variable display state of the decorative design is determined to be the reach state. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected according to whether the gaming state is the normal state, the second probability variation state, the first probability variation state, or the short time state. That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected when in the normal state or the second probability variation state, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B is selected when in the first probability variation state, and the reach variation pattern type when in the short time state. The decision table 135C is selected.

  Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C uses one of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C to reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach. It may be selected as a use table depending on whether or not the decision to enter the reach state such as HC2-1 has been made. That is, when the reach determination table 132A shown in FIG. 12A is used to determine one of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as the use table. When the reach HB2-1 is determined using the reach determination table 132B shown in FIG. 12B, the reach variation pattern determination table 135B is selected as the use table, and the reach determination table 132C shown in FIG. When the reach HC2-1 is determined, the reach variation pattern determination table 135C may be selected as the use table. This eliminates the need for data indicating table selection settings for selecting one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C corresponding to the gaming state.

  In each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C, depending on whether the determination result indicating the reach state is reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, or reach HC2-1. Numerical values (determined values) to be compared with the value of the random number MR3 for determining the pattern type are assigned to the fluctuation pattern type CA2-1 to the fluctuation pattern type CA2-4.

  In the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A, depending on which of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3 is the determination result for reaching the reach state, the ratio determined for each variation pattern type is different. A determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type. For example, a value (decision value) in the range of “1” to “190” is assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-1 and the other values are associated with the variation pattern type CA2-2 corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-1. ˜Assigned to variation pattern type CA2-4. Further, a value in the range of “1” to “195” is assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-1 corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-2. Further, a value in the range of “1” to “215” is assigned to the variation pattern type CA2-1 corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-3. The reach HA 2-1 is determined by the reach determination table 132A shown in FIG. 12A to be compared with the reach determination random number value MR2-2 corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”. A value has been assigned. The reach HA 2-2 is assigned a decision value corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “1” or “2”. The reach HA2-3 is assigned a decision value corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “3” or “4” or any one of “5” to “8”. With these settings, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “1”), the variation pattern type CA2− in which normal reach production (normal reach) is executed is compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio determined to 1 becomes high. And, the change time of the average special symbol in the fluctuation pattern that executes the reach production that becomes the normal reach is set to be shorter than the change time of the average special symbol in the fluctuation pattern that executes the reach production that becomes the super reach. If this is the case, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  FIG. 16 shows a configuration example of a non-reach variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 54. In this embodiment, non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C are prepared in advance as non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination tables. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when the variable display state of the decorative symbol is determined not to be the reach state. It is a table that is referenced to determine one of the types. Each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the second probability variation state, the first probability variation state, or the short-time state. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected when in the normal state or the second probability variation state, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected when in the first certain variation state, and the non-reach variation state when in the time reduction state. The variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected.

  The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C include, for example, non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, and non-reach HC1-2. The use table may be selected according to which of the determination results for not reaching the reach state. That is, when the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-5 are determined, the non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as the use table, and the non-reach HB 1-1 and non-reach HB 1-2 are selected. If determined to be either, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and if determined to be either non-reach HC1-1 or non-reach HC1-2, the non-reach variation pattern type The determination table 136C may be selected as the usage table. This eliminates the need for data indicating table selection settings for selecting any of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C corresponding to the gaming state.

  In each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-. Depending on whether the value is 1 or non-reach HC1-2, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the value of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a variation pattern type CA1-1 to variation pattern type CA1-. 4, the variable pattern type CB1-1 to the variable pattern type CB1-3 and the variable pattern type CC1-1 to the variable pattern type CC1-3.

  FIG. 17 shows a configuration example of the hit variation pattern determination table 137 stored in the ROM 54. The hit variation pattern determination table 137, when it is determined (predetermined) that the variable display result is “big hit”, changes the random number MR4 for determining the change pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. In the hit variation pattern determination table 137, according to the variation pattern type, the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a plurality of variations corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”. It is assigned to a pattern (big hit fluctuation pattern).

  FIG. 18 shows a configuration example of the loss variation pattern determination table 138 stored in the ROM 54. The loss variation pattern determination table 138 is used for determining a variation pattern according to whether or not to reach a reach state and the determination result of the variation pattern type when the variable display result is determined to be “lost” (preliminary determination). This table is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR4. In the loss variation pattern determination table 138, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type is one corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”, or It is assigned to a plurality of variation patterns (loss variation patterns).

  In the loss variation pattern determination table 138, re-variation such as the variation pattern PA1-4 is performed once in response to any of the variation pattern types CA1-4, variation pattern types CB1-3, and variation pattern types CC1-3. A determined value is assigned to a variation pattern (see FIG. 8A) in which a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. With this setting, even when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable pattern PA1-4 is selected to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. be able to. Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table 138, in response to the variation pattern type CA1-4, a variation pattern (a diagram) in which a “slip” variable display effect including a chance stop is performed, such as a variation pattern PA1-5. 8 (A)) is assigned a decision value. With such a setting, even when the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable pattern PA1-5 is selected, so that variable display such as “slip after chance eye stop” is performed. Production can be performed.

  For the variation pattern types CA1-4, in the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. 16A, among the determination values compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, non-reach HA1- A value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned to correspond to 1, and a value in the range of “230” to “241” is assigned to correspond to the non-reach HA 1-2, and is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-3. Correspondingly, values in the range of “231” to “241” are assigned, and values in the range of “237” to “241” are assigned to the non-reach HA1-4 and non-reach HA1-5, respectively. Yes. Here, in the reach determination table 132A shown in FIG. 12A, among the determined values to be compared with the reach determination random number value MR2-2, the total number of reserved memories corresponds to “0” to “1” to A value in the range of “204” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1, and a value in the range of “1” to “217” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-2 corresponding to the total pending storage number “1”. A value in the range of “1” to “220” corresponding to “2” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-3, and the total number of reserved storage is “3”, “4” corresponding to “2”. A value in the range of “1” to “230” is assigned to the non-reach HA1-4, and a value in the range of “1” to “233” is assigned to the non-reach corresponding to the total reserved memory number “5” to “8”. Assigned to HA1-5. Therefore, when the total number of stored storages is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type CA1-4 is lower than when the total number of stored storages is “0”. Further, when the total number of reserved memories is “3”, “4”, or “5” to “8”, the total number of reserved memories is “0”, or “1” or “2” Compared with the case of “”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type CA1-4 is lower.

  In the setting example of the loss variation pattern shown in FIG. 8A, the variable display time in the variation pattern PA1-1 in which the variable display effect such as “pseudo ream” or “slip after the chance eye stop” is not executed is 12000 milliseconds [ms. ], The variable display time in the variation pattern PA1-2 is set to 7000 milliseconds [ms], and the variable display time in the variation pattern PA1-3 is set to 5500 milliseconds [ms]. On the other hand, the variable display time in the variation pattern PA1-4 in which the “quasi-continuous” variable display effect is executed is set to 24000 milliseconds [ms]. Further, the variable display time in the variation pattern PA1-5 in which the variable display effect of “slip after chance stop” is executed is set to 32000 milliseconds [ms]. That is, when the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display time in the variation pattern PA1-4 in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed and the variable display effect of “slip after chance stop” are displayed. The variable display time in the executed variation pattern PA1-5 is longer than the variable display time in the variation pattern in which these effects are not executed. Then, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or more, it is a variation that executes a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” and a variable display effect of “slip after chance eye stop” as compared to the case of “0”. The ratio determined for the pattern type CA1-4 is low, and when the total reserved storage number is “3” or more, the variation pattern type CA1-4 is set as compared with the case where the total number is “3” or less. The percentage determined is low. Thus, the average variable display time can be shortened when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  The RAM 55 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 4 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  Such a RAM 55 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 19 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 19 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a start data storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control. A timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special figure game in which a game ball wins a first start winning opening 13 formed by the normal winning ball apparatus and the first start condition is satisfied but the first start condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (the special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is extracted from the random number circuit 503 and the like by the CPU 56 based on the establishment of the first start condition by winning in association with the hold number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening 13. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type are reserved data, and the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). Remember.

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B is characterized in that the game ball is won in the second start winning opening 14 formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 and the second start condition is satisfied but the second start condition is not satisfied. The holding data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is extracted from the random number circuit 503 or the like by the CPU 56 based on the establishment of the second start condition by winning in association with the hold number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening 14. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the big hit type are reserved data, and the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). Remember.

  The start data storage unit 151C stores start data indicating which of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 a game ball has won, so that the winning order of each game ball can be specified. As an example, the start data storage unit 151 </ b> C has “first” start data indicating a winning at the first start winning opening 13 or “second” start data indicating a winning at the second starting winning opening 14. The game balls are stored in association with the hold numbers according to the winning order of each game ball.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a probability change flag, a short time flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b, and the like. In the step S15 of FIG. 38 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. 39, it is instructed which process should be selected and executed. The normal symbol process flag is used to select / execute any process in step S16 of FIG. 38 or the normal symbol process shown in FIG. 47 in order to control the progress of the normal symbol game using the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 10. Tell what to do.

  The big hit flag is set to the on state in response to the determination (predetermined) that the variable display result is “big hit” when the special game is started. On the other hand, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to the big hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. The small hit flag is set to the on state in response to the determination (predetermined) that the variable display result is “small hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to the small hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game.

  The probability change flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the high probability gaming state such as the first probability variation state or the second probability variation state, while the high probability gaming state is ended. Cleared in response to, etc., and turned off. The time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the time reduction state or the first probability change state, while the time reduction state or the first probability change state ends. Correspondingly cleared and turned off. In this way, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be specified from the state of the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. That is, if both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off, the gaming state is a normal state. If the probability variation flag is off and the time reduction flag is on, the gaming state is a time reduction state. If both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are on, the gaming state is the first probability change state. If the probability variation flag is on and the time reduction flag is off, the gaming state is the second certain variation state.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, the time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main board 31 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to a time measured to control the progress of the big hit gaming state, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time, such as a start time of a big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 31 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as the variable display time (special figure variation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game. . As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The universal variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 31 side, a time for controlling the progress of the universal diagram game such as a variable symbol display time (ordinary variation time) of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary game. . As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 includes a random counter, a first start winning determination counter, a second start winning determination counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, and a total reserved memory number counter. , A short time counter, a round counter, etc. are provided.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 is a numerical value extracted from the random number circuit 503 separately from the random number circuit 503 or a part of numerical data indicating a random value used for controlling the progress of the game. This is for the CPU 56 to use the data and count so as to be updatable by software. For example, numerical data indicating random values MR2-1, MR2-2, MR3, MR4, and MR5 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 56 The numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 56 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 503, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 503. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on the numerical data.

  The first start winning determination counter counts the number of times that it has been determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal that is the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the first start port switch 13a is on. belongs to. For example, each time it is determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal from the first start port switch 13a is on, the stored value in the first start winning determination counter is incremented by one. Then, when the stored value in the first start winning determination counter reaches a predetermined winning determination value, it is determined that the game ball that has entered the first start winning opening 13 is normally detected. In addition, the stored value in the first start winning determination counter is cleared when it is determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal is OFF or when it is determined that the winning determination value has been reached. It may be initialized to “0”.

  The second start winning determination counter counts the number of times that it has been determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal that is the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the second start port switch 14a is on. belongs to. For example, each time it is determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal from the second start port switch 14a is ON, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is incremented by one. Then, when the stored value in the second start winning determination counter reaches a predetermined winning determination value, it is determined that the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening 14 has been normally detected. In addition, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is cleared when the signal state in the second start winning signal is determined to be off, or when it is determined that the winning determination value has been reached. It may be initialized to “0”.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The time reduction counter is used to count the number of remaining special-purpose games that can be executed until the time reduction control is ended when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the time reduction state. For example, when the jackpot gaming state is ended, data indicating the count initial value “100” corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value being “0” is set as the hourly count count value in the hourly number counter. . Thereafter, until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the time count count value is subtracted by 1 every time the special game is finished. Then, when the time reduction count value reaches “0”, the time reduction flag is cleared and turned off, for example, to control to end the time reduction state and shift to the normal state.

  The round number counter is for counting the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round is completed and the next round is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated.

  Game control buffer setting unit 155 Various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a start port buffer, a variation special figure designation buffer, a big hit type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 31 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer is configured to include a plurality of (for example, “12”) buffer areas, and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 54 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The starting port buffer stores a buffer value indicating which of the first starting winning port 13 and the second starting winning port has been detected. As an example, “1” is set to the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of a game ball that has entered the first start winning port 13. Further, “2” is set to the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of the game ball that has entered the second start winning port 14.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, “1” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a. Further, “2” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b. Then, in response to the end of the special figure game, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0”.

  The big hit type buffer stores a buffer value corresponding to a determination result in which the big hit type is one of a plurality of types when the variable display result is “big hit”. As an example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 11, if the jackpot type is “15R non-probable change”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “0” and the jackpot type is set to “15R probable change”. ”Is set to“ 1 ”for the jackpot type buffer value,“ 2 ”is set to the jackpot type buffer value if the jackpot type is“ 2R uncertain change ”, and the jackpot type is“ 2R probability change ”. For example, “3” is set to the big hit type buffer value.

  The I / O 57 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 4 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 560. And an output port for transmission.

  For example, an effect control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5 is mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG. The production control microcomputer 100 receives the production control command for instructing the production content from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77, and the first attached symbol display 9a and the second attached display variably display the attached symbols. Display control in the symbol display 9b, display control in the effect display device 9 that variably displays decorative symbols, and the like are performed. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 performs lighting control of the decoration LED 25 provided on the gaming board 6 and lighting control of the frame LED 28 provided on the gaming machine frame 2 via the lamp driver board 35. In addition, the sound output control in the speaker 27 is performed via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 5, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The production control microcomputer 100 may be configured to include a production control CPU 101, a RAM that stores information related to the production, and the like. In the present embodiment, a game history table to be described later is stored in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 100. The RAM may be externally attached. The RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 may not be backed up by the power source. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a ROM (not shown) built in the effect control microcomputer 100 or is input via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103 in response to the capture signal (effect control INT signal) from 31. Hereinafter, the ROM built in or externally provided in the effect control microcomputer 100 is also referred to as effect control ROM. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for temporarily storing (developing) image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, data of people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative symbols), accompanying symbols, and background images. It is a ROM to keep. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The input port 107 mounted on the effect control board 80 is connected to wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal from the operation detection switch 38a. The operation detection signal input to the input port 107 is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. The effect control microcomputer 100 executes a process for producing a game effect such as a notice effect based on the operation detection signal from the operation detection switch 38a.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). Any unidirectional circuit may be used as the restricting means. An effect control command or the like input to the input driver 102 is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the input port 103.

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, vibration motors 87 a, 87 b, 87 c that are provided in the vicinity of the upper effect LED 85 a, the middle effect LED 85 b, and the lower effect LED 85 c and vibrate the mounting portion of each LED are driven via the output port 106. Here, the vibration motor 87a vibrates the upper effect LED 85a, the vibration motor 87b vibrates the middle effect LED 85b, and the vibration motor 87c vibrates the lower effect LED 85c. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. In addition, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the side of the gaming machine frame 2 such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, current is supplied to the decoration LED 25, the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c provided on the game board 6 side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The audio data ROM 704 stores audio data corresponding to the sound number data. The sound data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period). The voice synthesizing IC 703 reads voice data for generating sound and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data from the voice data ROM 704 and temporarily stores (decompresses) the voice data in a predetermined voice RAM or the like, and then corresponds to the voice data. The generated audio signal (analog audio signal) is output to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27.

  In the production control microcomputer 100 mounted on the production control board 80, numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the production operation is updated by a built-in or external random number circuit (not shown). Count as possible. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 19, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 80, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, for temporary stop symbol determination before re-lottery Random number value SR2, random number values SR3-1 to SR3-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols, random number SR4-1 for determining the redrawing effect execution and determining the promotion effect execution during the jackpot, SR4-2, numerical data indicating random number values SR6-1 and SR6-2 for determining notice execution and for determining notice pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used.

  The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. The random number circuit built in or externally provided in the effect control microcomputer 100 may be anything that counts numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values. The effect control CPU 101 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit, such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of the number may be counted. Alternatively, by executing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and arithmetic processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit built in or attached to the production control microcomputer 100, all of the random number values are obtained. Alternatively, numerical data indicating a part may be updated. Further, if the effect control board 80 is not equipped with a random number circuit, the effect control CPU 101 may use a random counter to count numerical data indicating all random number values.

  Random values SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “decided” symbols that are variable display results of ornament symbols, “left”, “middle”, “right” ”Is a random value used to determine a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) derived and displayed in each symbol display area 9L, 9C, 9R. Note that the final stop symbol here is finally stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends. It is three decorative designs. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol before the re-lottery is “left”, “middle”, “right” before the re-lottery effect is executed when the re-lottery effect that is promoted during the change is executed. Is a random value used for determining a decorative symbol of a normal jackpot combination that is temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”. The random numbers SR3-1 to SR3-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left” when the variable display effect is executed when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are random values used for determining a decorative symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be temporarily stopped and displayed. As an example, the first pseudo-random temporary stop symbol determination random value SR3-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo-simultaneous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR3-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the random value SR3-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”. The random value SR4-1 for determining the re-lottery effect execution is a random number value used for determining whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “103”. The random number SR4-2 for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect is a random value used for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “101”. .

  The random number SR6-1 for determining the notice execution is a random value used for determining whether to execute the notice effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “111”. The random number SR6-2 for determining the notice pattern is a random value used for determining any of the plurality of patterns prepared in advance as the notice pattern corresponding to the content of the effect operation when the notice effect is executed. , “1” to “201”.

  In addition to the effect control program, various data tables used for controlling the effect operation are stored in the effect control ROM built in or attached to the effect control microcomputer 100. For example, the effect control ROM stores a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 101 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the control pattern table, and the like. .

  FIGS. 21A to 21C show configuration examples of the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C stored in the effect control ROM. The final stop symbol determination tables 160 </ b> A to 160 </ b> C are tables that are referred to in order to determine a combination of decorative symbols to be a definite decorative symbol from among a plurality of predetermined non-reach combinations. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 160A includes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, which is the final symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the final symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. FIG. 11 is a table referred to for determination based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 160A, the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 are numerical values that are compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol ( Decision value) is assigned. The final stop symbol determination table 160B displays the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, which is a finalized symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, among the finalized symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine based on the final stop symbol FZ1-1 or the second final stop symbol determination random number SR1-2. In the final stop symbol determination table 160B, in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the symbol number “” of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. Numerical values (determined values) to be compared with the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol are assigned to “1” to “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 160C displays the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3, which is a fixed ornament symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C among the predetermined ornament symbols that are a predetermined non-reach combination. This table is referred to for determination based on the final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3, and the like.

  Here, the production control ROM stores table data constituting a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 22, and a combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. Therefore, it is determined whether the left / right output type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. In the final stop symbol determination table 160C, the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8”.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B, a determination value is assigned to a portion where the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. It is not done. With such a setting, when a confirmed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the determined decorative symbol combination can be prevented from being a reach combination or a jackpot combination. In the final stop symbol determination table 160C, the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is a combination of predetermined decorative symbols. The decision value is not assigned. For example, even if it is other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the part that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 2A, or the part that becomes the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. Furthermore, a determined value to be compared with the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to a portion that is a fixed non-reach combination as shown in FIG. The combination of decorative patterns as shown in FIG. 23 is composed of decorative patterns included in, for example, the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8, the second chances of opening TC1 to TC4, etc., and “left”, “middle”, “right” Such that the arrangement order of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R is different from that of the player, the chance that the player will mistake the pseudo-ream chances GC1-GC8, the second chance of opening TC1-TC4, etc. Includes a combination of symbols. With such a setting, when determining a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination as the final stop symbol, the definitive decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous chance item GC1 to GC8, a second opening chance item TC1 to TC4, etc. It is possible to avoid a certain non-reach combination similar to such an opportunity.

  24A and 24B show configuration examples of final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B stored in the effect control ROM. The final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B are tables for determining a confirmed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 162A includes a left final stop symbol FZ2-1 that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the fixed decorative symbols that are reach-losing combinations, and “right The right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is a confirmed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 9R, is referred to based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. It is a table. In the final stop symbol determination table 162A, symbol numbers “1” to “1” of decorative symbols (left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, FZ2-2) that are the same as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. 8 ”is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 162B displays the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3, which is the final symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, among the final symbol symbols that are the reach-losing combinations. It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value SR1-3 for symbol determination.

  The middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 constituting the reach-losing combination is specified by a symbol difference that is a difference value between the symbol numbers of the decorative symbols that are the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. That is, in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variation of the decorative symbol is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, and “left” → “right” → “middle” In the predetermined order, for example, when the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result of the decorative pattern is derived and displayed, “left” and “right” other than the “middle” symbol display area 9C where the decorative symbol is derived and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2, which are derived and displayed in the symbol display areas 9L and 9R, are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the middle stop is determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162B. The difference (symbol difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 derived and displayed in the symbol display area 9C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, a final decorative symbol which is the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 derived and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C is determined. In the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the third final stop symbol determination is performed for symbol differences “−2”, “−1”, “+1”, and “+2” corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value SR1-3 for use is assigned.

  25A to 25C show configuration examples of final stop symbol determination tables 163A to 163C stored in the effect control ROM. The final stop symbol determination tables 163A to 163C are tables that are referred to in order to determine a combination of decorative symbols to be a definite decorative symbol from a plurality of predetermined jackpot combinations. For example, in the final stop symbol determination table 163A, left symbols that are stopped and displayed together in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as the fixed decorative symbols that are usually the big hit combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2 and FZ3-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are set. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned. The final stop symbol determination table 163B displays the left, middle, and right symbols that are stopped and displayed together in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. It is a table referred to in order to determine the final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the symbol numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” of the probability variation symbols that are the same as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are set. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned. The final stop symbol determination table 163C displays a stop display in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as the confirmed decorative symbols that become one of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4. This table is referred to for determining the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1, FZ4-2, and FZ4-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. In the final stop symbol determination table 163C, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned to each of the second release chances TC1 to TC4.

  FIG. 26A shows a configuration example of the re-lottery effect execution determination table 164A stored in the effect control ROM. The re-lottery effect execution determination table 164A indicates whether or not the re-lottery effect is executed when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R non-probable change” or “15R probable change”. It is a table referred to in order to determine based on random number value SR4-1 for determination. In the re-lottery effect execution determination table 164A, when the big hit type is “15R non-probable change” or “15R probable change”, or when it is the big hit type of “15R probable change”, the final stop symbol is a normal symbol (normal big hit combination) ) And probability variation (probability big hit combination), whether or not the numerical value (decision value) compared with the random value SR4-1 for determining the re-lottery effect execution executes the re-lottery effect. In addition, when a re-lottery effect is executed, it is assigned to a determination result of either promotion success (change promotion success effect during change) or promotion failure (change promotion failure effect during change).

  FIG. 26B shows a configuration example of the big hit middle promotion effect execution determination table 164B stored in the effect control ROM. The jackpot promotion promotion execution determination table 164B shows whether or not the jackpot promotion promotion execution is executed when the variable display result is “big hit” and the jackpot type is “15R non-probability change” or “15R probability change”. It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number SR4-2 for promotion effect execution determination. In the jackpot promotion promotion execution determination table 164B, a numerical value (determination) to be compared with the random value SR4 for determining the jackpot promotion promotion execution depending on whether the jackpot type is “15R non-probable change” or “15R probability change”. Value) is a result of determining whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, and in the case of executing the jackpot promotion effect, either of the promotion success (successful promotion of jackpot promotion) or the promotion failure (promotion failure of jackpot promotion) Is assigned to the decision result. Here, in the big success promotion effect during the big hit, it is notified that the high probability game state such as the first certain change state is set. On the other hand, in the big hit mid-promotion failure production, it is not notified that a high probability gaming state is set.

  FIG. 27 shows a configuration example of the temporary stop symbol determination table 165 before re-lottery stored in the effect control ROM. The temporary stop symbol determination table 165 before the re-lottery is a random value for determining the temporary stop symbol before the re-lottery when the re-lottery effect is executed, and the decorative symbols to be displayed temporarily stop before the re-lottery effect is executed. It is a table referred to for determination based on SR2. In the temporary stop symbol determination table 165 before the re-lottery, the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “6” of the normal symbols that are the same as the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3. 8 ”is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol before re-lottery.

  FIG. 28 shows a configuration example of a pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol determination table used to determine a decorative symbol or the like that is temporarily stopped and displayed when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. In this embodiment, pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D shown in FIGS. 28 (A) to (D) are prepared in advance as the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table. It is stored in the area. Each of the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D includes a variation pattern designated by a variation pattern designation command and a finalized symbol to be a final stop symbol when a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. Is selected as a use table in accordance with the remaining number of display operations that become pseudo continuous fluctuations (total re-variation) executed until is stopped and displayed. The remaining number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is, for example, “0” in the decorative symbol fluctuation (pseudo continuous fluctuation) in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, and the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed one time before that. The final stop symbol is set to “1” for the decorative symbol variation (pseudo continuous variation) and “2” for the decorative symbol variation (pseudo continuous variation) in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed twice before. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo-continuous variation (variation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed until the pseudo continuous variation in which the fixed decorative symbol is displayed is stopped. It should be noted that there is no difference in the remaining number of pseudo continuous fluctuations depending on whether or not the variable display effect of “slip after chance stop” is executed. In this embodiment, the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is also used to determine a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when the variable display effect of “slip after chance stop” is executed.

  As an example, the quasi-continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166A displays the quasi-continuous variation that is executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the designation of the variation pattern PA1-4. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the right to be temporarily stopped in the “right” symbol display area 9R. The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 as the symbol, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 as the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C are selected as the use table. In addition, the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166A includes “chance points” such as any one of the variation pattern PA1-5, the variation pattern PA3-8, the variation pattern PA6-5, the variation pattern PF1-5, and the variation pattern PF1-6. Temporary stop display is performed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in response to designation of a variation pattern in which the variable display effect of “slip after stop” is executed. It is also selected as a use table for determining the decorative design to be performed.

  In the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination table 166B, in addition to the variation pattern PA1-4, when the variation pattern in which the “simulated sequence” variable display effect is executed is designated, the final decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol is displayed. When the remaining number of pseudo continuous fluctuations executed until the stop display is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, “ In the “right” symbol display area 9R, the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “middle” symbol display area 9C, are determined. Is selected as a use table. In the example of setting the loss variation pattern and the big hit variation pattern shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, as the variation patterns other than the variation pattern PA1-4, the variation pattern PA2-2, the variation pattern PA3-2, and the variation pattern PA3- 3, variation pattern PA3-5, variation pattern PA3-8, variation pattern PA4-2, variation pattern PA5-2, variation pattern PA5-3, variation pattern PA6-2 to variation pattern PA6-5, variation pattern PF1-2, In the fluctuation pattern PF1-4 and the fluctuation pattern PF1-6, a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed.

  The pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166C includes any one of the fluctuation pattern PA3-3, the fluctuation pattern PA3-6, the fluctuation pattern PA3-7, the fluctuation pattern PA5-3, the fluctuation pattern PA6-3, and the fluctuation pattern PA6-4. In response to the designation, when the remaining number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “2”, in the “left” symbol display area 9L In the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be displayed temporarily, and in the right temporary symbol KZ3-2, which is the right symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R, in the “middle” symbol display area 9C It is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3, which is the intermediate symbol to be displayed for temporary stop. The pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the designation of either the variation pattern PA3-7 or the variation pattern PA6-4. When the remaining number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is “3”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the “right” symbol display area 9R The right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2, which is the right symbol for temporary stop display, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ4-3, which is the middle symbol for temporary stop display in the “medium” symbol display area 9C, are selected as the use table. Is done.

  In the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A and 166B shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, the symbol numbers of the decorative symbols that become the final stop symbols (left final stop symbols) in the “left” symbol display area 9L, respectively. In accordance with “1” to “8”, the first pseudo-continuous temporary stop is applied to the pseudo-continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8 constituted by the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value SR3-1 for design determination is assigned. In the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166C shown in FIG. 28C, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 determined using the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166B, Depending on whether the combination of the temporary stop symbol 2-3 is one of the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8, the pseudo-continuous composed of the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3-2 and KZ3-3. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR3-2 for determining the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is assigned to the chances GC1 to GC8. In the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166D shown in FIG. 28D, the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, the right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, which are determined using the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166C, Depending on whether the combination of the temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 is the pseudo-continuous chance GC1-GC8, the pseudo-continuous composed of the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, KZ4-3 A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR3-3 for determining the third pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is assigned to the chance points GC1 to GC8.

  By determining the temporary stop symbol using these pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D, for example, as shown in FIG. 29, the pseudo continuous variation (including the initial variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous”. ) In accordance with the number of times of execution), the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are displayed for the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. Either can be determined.

  In the case of either the variation pattern PA3-8 or the variation pattern PA6-5, after the pseudo continuous variation is executed once in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect, the “slip after the chance eye stop” is performed. A variable display effect is executed (see FIGS. 8A and 8B). Therefore, in the case of these fluctuation patterns, the temporary stop symbol determined using the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166A shown in FIG. Then, after the change (pseudo continuous change) is performed again, the same temporary stop symbol may be displayed temporarily in the variable display effect of “slip after chance stop”. Alternatively, the decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is determined using the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination table 166B shown in FIG. The decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped in the variable display effect may be determined using the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determining table 166A shown in FIG.

  FIG. 30 shows a configuration example of the notice effect execution determination table 169 stored in the effect control ROM. The notice effect execution determination table 169 is a table referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect based on the random value SR6-1 for determining the notice execution. In the notice effect execution determination table 169, a random number value for determining notice execution is added to the decision result indicating the presence or absence of the notice effect depending on whether the variable display result is “losing”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with SR6-1 is assigned.

  FIG. 31 shows a configuration example of a notice pattern determination table and the like stored in the effect control ROM. In this embodiment, a notice pattern determination table 170 shown in FIG. 31 is prepared in advance as the notice pattern determination table. The notice pattern determination table 170 is a table that is referred to in order to determine a plurality of notice patterns prepared in advance based on the random number SR6-2 for determining the notice pattern when the notice effect is executed. . In the notice pattern determination table 170, whether the variable display result is “losing (non-reach)”, “losing (reach)”, “big hit (15R)”, “big hit (2R)”, or “small hit”. Accordingly, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR6-2 for determining the notice pattern is assigned to one of the notice patterns of the notice X, notice Y, and notice Z.

  Here, the variable display result of “losing (non-reach)” shown in FIG. 31 indicates a case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”, and the variable of “losing (reach)” is variable. The display result indicates a case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. The variable display result of “big hit (15R)” indicates the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R non-probable change” or “15R positive change”, and the variable display result of “big hit (2R)” The result indicates a case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R uncertain change” or “2R probability change”. The notice pattern of the notice X is a notice pattern for executing the notice effect of “character display”, and the notice pattern of the notice Y is a notice pattern of executing the notice effect of the “step-up operation”. The notice pattern is a notice pattern for executing the notice effect of “jog operation notice”.

  In the notice pattern determination table 170, a decision value is assigned to each notice pattern so that the ratio determined for each notice pattern differs depending on which of the plurality of types of variable display results is decided.

  In the notice effect execution determination table 169 shown in FIG. 30 and the notice pattern determination table 170 shown in FIG. 31, whether or not the notice effect is executed is executed depending on which of the plurality of types of variable display results is executed. It is set so that the notice pattern in the case can be determined. On the other hand, depending on which of the plurality of types of variation patterns indicated in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 31, whether or not to perform the announcement effect, and the announcement pattern in the case of execution May be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the effect control ROM incorporated in or externally provided in the effect control microcomputer 100 corresponds to a plurality of effect modes such as mode A, mode J, mode K, and mode N. Table data constituting the various effect control pattern tables 180A to 180F is stored. The effect control ROM stores table data constituting a mode transition effect control pattern table 181 as shown in FIG. 32B, various effect control pattern tables 182 as shown in FIG. Has been. The mode transition effect control pattern table 181 only needs to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls in the mode transition effect executed in accordance with the mode transition as the mode transition effect control pattern. The various effect control pattern table 182 only needs to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls during the period in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state. . The various effect control pattern tables 182 may be configured to be included in each of the effect control pattern tables 180A to 180F corresponding to the effect modes of mode A, mode J, mode K, and mode N. In this case, the contents of the effect operation in the period controlled in the big hit game state or the small hit game state may be made different depending on which of the plurality of types of effect modes in the pachinko gaming machine 1. it can.

  In each of the effect control pattern tables 180A to 180F shown in FIG. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of control of various production operations having different modes as production control patterns. For example, each of the effect control pattern tables 180A to 180F includes a symbol variation control pattern table 185 shown in FIG. 33A and a notice effect control pattern table 186 shown in FIG.

  In the symbol variation control pattern table 185, in response to a plurality of variation patterns and the like, an effect display device in a period from the start of variable display of ornament symbols until the finalized symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed Various display operations such as decorative display operation of decorative designs on the display screen of 9, display display operation of reach production, display operation of decorative designs in variable display production such as “pseudo-run” and “slip after chance stop” It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating control contents as symbol variation control patterns. In the notice effect control pattern table 186, a plurality of types of data indicating the control contents of the effect operation in the notice effect may be stored corresponding to a plurality of notice patterns prepared in advance as the notice effect control pattern. In addition, each production | presentation control pattern table 180A-180F is good also as an address management table which manages the memory | storage address of the pattern data which comprises multiple types of production control patterns. In this case, in the effect control ROM, table data constituting each effect control pattern table 180A to 180F is stored in a predetermined storage area, and a pattern constituting each effect control pattern in a different area from this storage area. Data only needs to be stored.

  In the symbol fluctuation control pattern stored in the symbol fluctuation control pattern table 185 and the notice effect control pattern stored in the notice effect control pattern table 186, the effect modes in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have a plurality of modes A, mode J, and modes. Regardless of whether the mode is K or mode N, data indicating the control content of the common rendering operation may be included. In this case, the data indicating the control content of the rendering operation common to each rendering mode is shared in the common rendering control pattern table provided separately from the rendering control pattern tables 180A to 180F corresponding to each rendering mode. It may be stored as a pattern. As an example, the control content of the rendering operation associated with the variable display of the decorative symbols in the period before the variable display state of the decorative symbols becomes the reach state is individual for each rendering mode. It is specified by the symbol variation control pattern stored in 180A to 180F. On the other hand, the control content of the rendering operation including the reach rendering after the variable display state of the decorative symbol has reached the reach state is common to each rendering mode, and the design fluctuation stored in the common rendering control pattern table It may be specified by a control pattern.

  FIG. 34A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. Mode transition effect control pattern stored in mode transition effect control pattern table 181, various effect control patterns stored in various effect control pattern table 182, symbol variation control pattern stored in symbol variation control pattern table 185, and notice effect Various effect control patterns such as the notice effect control pattern stored in the control pattern table 186 include, for example, an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, movable member control data, and an end code. It is composed of control data for controlling various performance operations, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various performance controls, the timing of switching the performance control, and the like in time series. In addition, in the effect control pattern, for example, a period for effectively detecting an operation on the operation unit such as a jog button or a jog dial included in the operation unit 38, an operation for designating control contents of the effect operation when it is detected effectively, etc. Detection control data and the like may be included. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 shown in FIG. A determination value corresponding to the operation execution time (effect time) is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 31, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer 100. Data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the display screen of the effect display device 9, for example, data indicating the change mode of each decoration symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 27, such as data indicating an output mode of a sound effect or the like that is interlocked with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies an audio output operation from the speaker 27. The lamp control data includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as the decoration LED 25 and the frame LED 28. That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the lighting operation of the light emitter. The movable member control data includes data indicating an operation mode of the movable member such as a movable member 78 connected to the motor 86, for example. That is, the movable member control data is data that designates a driving operation of the movable member. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 34B is a diagram for describing various rendering operations that are executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. In the production control microcomputer 100, the production control CPU 101 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 27 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to blink the light emitter in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and a mode specified by the movable member control data. Then, the control for operating the movable member 78 is performed. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect control CPU 101 in the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, when starting variable display of decorative symbols. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the effect control ROM and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM. It is also possible to temporarily store the storage address of the pattern data constituting the effect control ROM in a predetermined area of the RAM and designate the reading position of the stored data in the effect control ROM. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect devices (effect display device 9, speaker 27, decoration LED 25, and frame LED 28) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. And the like, and the control of the movable member such as the movable member 78 is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, movable member control data # 1 to movable member control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device, and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control microcomputer 100 to the VDP 109, the audio output board 70, and the like. In the VDP 109 that has received a command from the effect control microcomputer 100, the image data indicated by the command is read from the CGROM and temporarily stored in the VRAM. In the audio output board 70 that has received a command from the production control microcomputer 100, for example, the voice synthesis IC 703 reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM 704 and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. Expand.

  For example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 35 is provided in the RAM incorporated in or attached to the effect control microcomputer 100 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. It has been. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 35 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state on the display screen of the effect display device 9, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating flag values and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation on the display screen of the effect display device 9. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 31, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 560 is activated, and the CPU 56 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 56 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 55 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 560 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 56 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 56 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process. When the CPU 56 having executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 36 is started, the CPU 56 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 32a, the first and second starter switch 13a, The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as 14a and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 31 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 56 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display 8b and setting of the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 56 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 10 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 15 are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. In the normal symbol process, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first certain change state or the short time state, the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 as compared to the normal state or the second certain variation state. Settings and controls are performed to increase the possibility of doing so. For example, when the first probability variation state or the short-time state is established, the control for reducing the normal symbol variable display time in the regular game by the normal symbol display device 10 is shorter than that in the normal state or the second probability variation state, Control that increases the probability that the variable symbol display result of a normal symbol in a game will be “per-normal” than in the normal state or the second probability variation state, and normal variable based on the fact that the variable display result is “per-normal” Control that makes the tilting time of the movable blade piece in the winning ball device 15 longer than that in the normal state or the second certain variation state, control that increases the number of tilts than in the normal state or the second certain variation state, or these Settings for performing a combination of some or all of the controls are performed.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 transmits the control command from the main board 31 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 80 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, the effect control among the output ports included in the I / O 57 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 80, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. When the command control process is finished, the game control timer interrupt process is finished after the interrupt is permitted.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 37 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 56 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). 38 and 39 are flowcharts showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the CPU 56 first reads the input port data stored in the predetermined input port register (step S201). Here, the input port register is a register in which, for example, a bit value indicating an input state of an external signal at an input port included in the I / O 57 is stored. In this embodiment, the input port data stored in the bit number [0] of the input port register is the input state (OFF / ON) of the first start winning signal that becomes the detection signal transmitted from the first start port switch 13a. ), And the input port data stored in the bit number [1] of the input port register is the input state of the second start winning signal (OFF / ON).

  It is determined whether or not the bit value [1] of the input port register read in step S201 is “1” (step S202). At this time, if the bit value is “1” (step S202; Yes), the second start winning determination count value that is the stored value of the second start winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is, for example, Update so as to count up by adding 1 (step S203). On the other hand, when it is determined as “0” in step S202 (step S202; No), the second start winning determination counter is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0”. (Step S204).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S203 and S204, it is determined whether or not the bit value in the bit number [0] of the input port register read in step S201 is “1” (step S205). At this time, if the bit value is “1” (step S205; Yes), the first start winning determination count value that is the stored value of the first starting winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is, for example, It is updated so as to count up by adding 1 (step S206). On the other hand, when it is determined as “0” in step S205 (step S205; No), the first start winning determination counter is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0”. (Step S207).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S206 and S207, it is determined whether or not the first start winning determination count value has reached a predetermined determination value (for example, “2”) predetermined as a winning determination value. (Step S208). At this time, if the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S208; Yes), the starting port buffer value that is the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1” is set (step S209). Further, the first start winning determination counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S210).

  If the first start winning determination count value has not reached the winning determination value in step S208 (step S208; No), it is determined whether or not the second starting winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S211). ). At this time, if the second start winning determination count value has not reached the winning determination value (step S211; No), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S211; Yes), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S212). Further, the second start winning determination counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S213).

  After executing one of the processes of Steps S210 and S213, the CPU 56 reads the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (Step S214). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read, and the starting port buffer value is When it is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the read value in step S214 has reached a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S215 in FIG. 39). At this time, if the read value in step S214 does not reach the upper limit value, the starting condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is effectively established. For example, after it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 38 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, and it is determined in step S215 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value, A first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the one special symbol indicator 8a and variable display of the decorative symbol is established. When it is determined in step S211 shown in FIG. 38 that the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value and then it is determined in step S215 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value, The second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the two special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the decorative symbol is established.

  Thus, when the read value has not reached the upper limit value in step S215 (step S215; No), 1 is added to the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S216). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, 1 is added to the first reserved memory number count value, and when the starting port buffer value is “2”, 1 is added to the second reserved memory number count value. Then, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the total pending storage number count value that is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter indicating the total pending storage number that is the total value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number ( Step S217).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S217, the CPU 56 sets and stores start data corresponding to the start port buffer value at the head of the empty area in the start data storage unit 151C (step S218). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, start data indicating “first” is set, and when the start port buffer value is “2”, start data indicating “second” is set. Then, the CPU 56 extracts numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 or the random counter. (Step S219). Numeric data indicating each random value extracted in this way is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value, thereby storing each random value (step S220). . For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 and MR2-1 are set in the first special figure storage unit 151A, while the starting port buffer value is “2”. In some cases, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 and MR2-1 are set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  After the random number value is stored in step S220, a setting for transmitting a start port winning designation command corresponding to the start port buffer value is made (step S221). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the storage address (first address) of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 54 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address (head address) of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 54 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, for example, by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 36 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is done.

  Further, the CPU 56 stores the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 54 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, etc. Is set to transmit (step S222). The first start opening winning designation command table is configured to include setting data for transmitting the first starting opening winning designation command and setting data for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command. When the second start opening winning designation command table is configured to include setting data for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command and setting data for transmitting the pending storage number notification command As the processing of steps S221 and S222, only the storage address of the command table corresponding to the start port buffer value is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, out of the first start port winning designation command table and the second start port winning designation command table. do it. For example, when the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. Subsequent to the winning prize designation command, it is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

  If the read value has reached the upper limit value in step S215 (step S215; Yes), or after executing the process of step S222, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is “1” or “2”. Determination is made (step S223). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “1” (step S223; “1”), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S224), and then FIG. The process proceeds to step S211 shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2” (step S223; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S225). The start winning determination process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, when both of the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a detect a start winning of a game ball that is effective at the same time, both processes are executed by processing executed within 2 milliseconds. A process based on the fact that the switch has detected a start winning of a valid game ball is executed. That is, when it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 38 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, the processing in steps S209, S210, and S214 shown in FIG. After executing the processing of steps S215 to S222 shown in FIG. 38, the processing of step S224 is executed in response to the start port buffer value being “1” in step S223, and then the processing of step S211 shown in FIG. Proceed to processing. When it is determined in step S211 that the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, the processing in steps S212 to S214 shown in FIG. 40 is executed, and then steps S215 to S222 shown in FIG. After executing the process, the process of step S225 is executed in response to the fact that the start port buffer value is “2” in step S223, and then the start winning determination process is terminated. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a detect a valid start winning of a game ball at the same time, it is possible to reliably complete the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings.

  After the start winning determination process as described above is executed, one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 shown in FIG. 37 is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag. The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol storage unit 151A and the second special diagram storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not the special game is started by the display 8b. Also, in the special symbol normal process, whether the variable display result of the special symbol, the decorative symbol, the attached symbol or the like is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. No is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the final special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b). Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a pre-decision result on whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, a reach decision result on whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, etc. The process includes determining a variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, and determining a variation pattern as a plurality of types in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation processing includes processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special graphic by the first special symbol display 8a or a special game using the second special graphic by the second special symbol display 8b, a common timer is used. The elapsed time is measured. It is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation process in step S112 is performed by the first special symbol display 8a using the first special symbol in the special symbol game or the second special symbol display 8b. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b are used to stop the variation of the special symbol and to stop and display the fixed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result. A process for setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag or the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. When the big hit flag is on, the special process flag value is set to “ Update to 4 ". When the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. Further, when both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are OFF, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big winning gaming state and setting the opening for the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” Etc. are included. At this time, for example, depending on whether the big hit type is “15R uncertain variation”, “15R uncertain variation”, “2R uncertain variation”, or “2R certain variation”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set. You may make it set. As an example, when the big hit type is controlled to the 15 round big hit state corresponding to “15R non-probable change” or “15R probable change”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. ”And the number of times of opening of the big prize opening, which is the number of round executions, is set to“ 15 ”. On the other hand, when the big hit type is controlled to the two round big hit state corresponding to “2R non-probable change” or “2R probable change”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “ “0.5 seconds”, and the number of times of opening of the big prize opening, which is the number of round executions, is set to “2 times”.

  The special winning opening releasing process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This process during opening of the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 21 may be executed.

  The post-opening processing for the special winning opening in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-opening process for the big prize opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of open big prize openings, This includes a process for making a setting for transmitting an end designation command when hit.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the frame LED 28, the decoration LED 25, etc. For example, a process for waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period of time elapses and a process for performing various settings for controlling to a special gaming state or a normal state corresponding to a jackpot type are included.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits is a setting for starting the execution of variable winning action in the small hit game state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, etc. The processing to perform is included. At this time, for example, in response to the variable display result being “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”, and the big winning opening in the variable winning operation is set. The number of times of opening may be set to “twice”.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 21 for the big winning opening door may be executed.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the frame LED 28, the decoration LED 25, etc. It includes processing to wait until it is done. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 40, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the total reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 is “0”, that is, the first reserved memory count. It is determined whether or not the total reserved memory number that is the total value of the second reserved memory numbers is “0” (step S231). At this time, if the total pending storage number count value is other than “0” (step S231; No), start data is read from the start data storage unit 151C (step S232). Here, the start data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the start data storage unit 151C may be read.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the total reserved storage number count value, the total reserved storage number is updated to be decremented by 1, and the start data storage unit 151C uses the hold number “1”. The storage contents of the start data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “8”) are shifted up by one entry (step S233). Then, it is determined whether the start data read in step S232 is “first” or “second” (step S234).

  When it is determined in step S234 that the start data is “first” (step S234; first), a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 8a is started. In response to the establishment of the 1 start condition, the variable special figure designation buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” (step S235). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S234 that the start data is “second” (step S234; second), a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 8b is started. In response to the establishment of the second start condition, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” (step S236).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S235 and S236, the hold data is read from the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start-up data read in step S232 (step S237). For example, when the start data is “first”, as the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a random value for determining the special figure display result The numerical data indicating MR1 and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are read out. On the other hand, when the start data is “second”, the hold data stored in association with the hold number “1” in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is used for determining the special figure display result. The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 and the numerical data indicating the random number MR2-1 for determining the jackpot type are respectively read out.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S237, the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start data is decremented by 1, and an entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the hold number “ The stored contents of the pending data stored in the entries corresponding to “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S238). For example, when the start data is “first”, the first reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the stored content of the held data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A is shifted upward by one entry. Let On the other hand, when the start data is “second”, the second reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the stored contents of the reserved data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B are stored one entry at a time. Shift to the top.

  Following the processing of step S238, a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the start data is used as a use table for determining whether the variable display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack”. Select and set (step S239). For example, if the start data is “first”, the first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 10A is set as the use table, while if the start data is “second”, FIG. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in B) is set as a use table. The CPU 56 refers to the special figure display result determination table set in this manner, and the numerical data indicating the special figure display result determination random number MR1 read in step S237 is the variable display result of “big hit”. It is determined whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” according to whether or not it matches any of the determined values assigned to (step S240).

  When it is determined in step S240 that the variable display result is “big hit” (step S240; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S241). ). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 11 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S242). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2-1 read in step S237, the jackpot type is set to “15R uncertain change” by referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in step S242. ”,“ 15R probability variation ”,“ 2R non-probability variation ”, and“ 2R probability variation ”are determined as one of a plurality of preset jackpot types (step S243). When the variation special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S236, the big hit type determination random number MR2 for the big hit type of “2R non-probable change” in the big hit type determination table 131. Since −1 is not assigned, the jackpot type is not determined to be “2R uncertain change”. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, the determined jackpot type is stored, for example, by updating the jackpot type buffer value that is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 ( Step S244). As an example, if the big hit type is “15R non-probable change”, the big hit type buffer value is “0”, “15R probable” is “1”, “2R non-probable” is “2”, “ If it is “2R probability variation”, it may be “3”.

  When it is determined in step S240 that the variable display result is not “big hit” (step S240; No), the numerical value indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result read in step S237. Whether or not the variable display result is “small hit” is determined according to whether or not the data matches any of the determined values assigned to the “small hit” variable display result (step S245). When it is determined that “small hit” is made (step S245; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S246).

  After executing either of the processes of steps S244 and S246, the result of prior determination as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state or the jackpot gaming state, and further the jackpot type determination result when the jackpot gaming state is set. Correspondingly, a confirmed special symbol is set (step S247). As an example, when it is determined in step S245 that the variable display result is not “small hit”, a lost pattern corresponding to the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “lost” is obtained. The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S245 that the variable display result is “small hit”, the small hit corresponding to the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “2” as the symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. In addition, when it is determined in step S240 that the variable display result is “big hit”, “1”, “3”, “ One of the special symbols indicating the numbers “5” and “7” is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “15R non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that becomes the 15R non-probable big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “15R probability variation”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the 15R probability variation big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. According to the determination result that the big hit type is “2R non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the 2R non-probable big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the jackpot type is “2R probability variation”, the special symbol indicating the number “5” that is the 2R probability variation large hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S247, the special symbol process flag value is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S248), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the total number of reserved memories is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S249), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. In the demonstration display setting in step S249, for example, a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the production display device 9 is sent from the main board 31 to the production control board 80. In contrast, it is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not yet transmitted, the transmission setting of the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed by setting the storage address of the customer waiting demonstration designation command table in the ROM 54 in the transmission command buffer, for example. The customer waiting demonstration designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, for example, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 38 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is done.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 41, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), one of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a plurality of types of variation pattern types are selected. It is set as a use table for determining either of them (step S262). Here, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified from the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S263). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S263; Yes), the small hit variation pattern type determination table 134 is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types ( Step S264).

  If the small hit flag is off in step S263 (step S263; No), whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the second probability variation state, the first probability variation state, or the short-time state Based on the table selection setting shown in FIG. 12D, one of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C is selected as a use table for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state. Set (step S265). At this time, for example, the total reserved memory number is specified by reading the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S266). Subsequently, a random value MR2-2 for reach determination is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S267). Based on the reach determination random number MR2-2 extracted in step S267, the presence / absence of the reach state is determined by referring to one of the reach determination tables 132A to 132C set in step S265 (step S265). S268), it is determined whether or not the determination result is a reach state (step S269).

  If it is determined in step S269 that the variable display state is the determination result of the reach state (step S269; Yes), the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C are determined according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is selected and set as a use table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types (step S270). On the other hand, if the determination result indicates that the variable display state is not the reach state (step S269; No), any of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C depending on the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types (step S271).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, S270, and S271, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S272). ). Then, based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S272, by referring to the use table set in any of steps S262, S264, S270, and S271, a plurality of variation pattern types are selected. Either one is determined (step S273). If any one of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected and set in step S262, the big hit type is determined based on, for example, the big hit type buffer value when executing the processing of step S273. It is determined whether “15R uncertain change”, “15R uncertain change”, “2R uncertain change”, or “2R probability change” is determined, and the variation pattern type is determined according to the specified jackpot type. That's fine. In addition, when the small hit variation pattern type determination table 134 is selected and set in step S264, when executing the processing of step S273, for example, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the state of the probability variation flag or the short time flag And the variation pattern type may be determined according to the specified gaming state. When any one of reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected and set at step S270, or when any one of non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected and set at step S271. The determination of the variation pattern type may be performed according to the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268.

  Here, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a based on the establishment of the first start condition. Whether to determine the type, or to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b based on the establishment of the second start condition Regardless, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, regardless of the determination result of the presence / absence of the reach state in step S268, it is changed by a common processing module using numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the change pattern type. The pattern type can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S273, the variation pattern type may be determined with reference to the determination table stored in the address of the ROM 54 set in the determination table pointer.

  After the variation pattern type is thus determined in step S273, whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is determined (predetermined result), or is determined in step S273. According to the variation pattern type, either the hit variation pattern determination table 137 shown in FIG. 17 or the loss variation pattern determination table 138 shown in FIG. 18 is selected, and the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of variation patterns prepared in advance. It is set as a use table for performing (step S274). Subsequently, a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S275). Then, based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern extracted in step S275, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S274 (step S276). .

  Here, in the processing of steps S275 and S276, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a based on the establishment of the first start condition. Whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display 8b based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied. Instead, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S275 and S276, the variation pattern is determined by the common processing module using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern regardless of the determination result of the presence / absence of the reach state in step S268. Can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S276, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 54 set in the determination table pointer.

  Following the determination of the variation pattern in step S276, a special diagram variation time which is a variable symbol display time corresponding to the variation pattern determination result is set (step S277). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S278). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b is performed.

  After executing the process of step S278, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the variable symbol display of special symbols are performed (step S279). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 56 performs a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 54 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. In the designated transmission command buffer, the data is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 56 performs a gaming state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 54 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is a buffer designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Store in the area.

  When such setting in step S279 is performed, every time the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 36 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 31 applies to the effect control board 80. Various production control commands are sequentially transmitted. FIG. 42 is a timing diagram illustrating an example of an operation of transmitting an effect control command from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 when starting the variable display of special symbols in the special figure game. When the start condition for starting the special figure game is satisfied, the CPU 56 generates a timer interrupt by executing the command control processing in step S17 shown in FIG. 36 based on the transmission setting in step S279 shown in FIG. Each time it occurs, a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command or a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, and a pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Note that the order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result notification command is transmitted first, the gaming state designation command, the first variation start command, or the second variation start command Alternatively, the change pattern designation command and the pending storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S280), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 43, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S291; Yes), the big hit start production waiting time is set (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the process of step S292, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 54 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Should be stored in. Thereafter, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S294). In addition, a setting for ending the special gaming state such as the first probability variation state, the second probability variation state, or the short time state is performed (step S295). For example, in step S295, a process for clearing the probability variation flag and the time-shortening flag to turn it off, and a process for clearing the time-shortening counter for counting the remaining number of special figure games that can be executed until the time-shortening state ends. Etc. may be executed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S296), and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S297). At this time, if the small hit flag is ON (step S297; Yes), a small hit start start waiting time is set (step S298). For example, in the process of step S298, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the small hitting start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer. Subsequently, as in the process of step S293, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 is performed (step S299). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S300). Further, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for small hits (step 301).

  If the small hit flag is off in step S297 (step S297; No), the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S302). After performing either of the processes of steps S301 and S302, it is determined whether or not the special gaming state such as the first probability variation state, the second probability variation state, or the short time state is to be ended (step S303), and then the special symbol. Terminate the stop process. For example, in the process of step S303, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value which is the stored value of the time reduction counter is updated by, for example, subtracting one. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated short time count value matches a predetermined short time end determination value (for example, “0” or the like). At this time, if it coincides with the time reduction end determination value, the time reduction control may be ended by clearing the time reduction flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the time reduction end determination value, the state of the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S303 may be ended. It should be noted that, for the first certain change state in which the time reduction flag is on and the probability change flag is on, the time reduction control may be continuously performed until the variable display result becomes “big hit”. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the time reduction control is ended even in the first certain change state, and the time reduction control may be ended based on the determination result of the end. When the time-shortening control is ended in this way, the normal state may be set by ending the probability variation control together. For the probability variation control, until the next variable display result becomes a “big hit”, or further predetermined Until the number of special figure games is executed, the second certain variation state may be continued.

  In the process of step S303, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for probability variation control termination determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, and probability variation control termination determination stored in the ROM 54 or the like in advance is performed. It may be determined whether or not the probability variation control is ended by referring to the table or when the number of executions of the special figure game during the probability variation control reaches a predetermined probability variation end determination value. On the other hand, in the process of step S303, the process for ending the probability variation control may not be executed, and the probability variation control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. Alternatively, the process for determining whether or not to end the probability variation control based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the probability variation control end is, for example, in step S231 shown in FIG. May be executed before determining (predetermining) whether or not to make the variable display result “big hit” in step S240.

  FIG. 44A is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 44 (A), the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the post-opening process for the big prize opening in step S116 shown in FIG. 37, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, “0” or the like). Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined according to whether or not the game has been done. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end stage waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S312). Subsequently, a setting for starting control of the gaming state according to the big hit type buffer read value that is the big hit type buffer value read in step S312 is performed (step S313). FIG. 44B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a setting example in step S313. As shown in FIG. 44 (B), when the big hit type buffer read value is “0”, the setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the time-saving state is performed. At this time, for example, the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag to the ON state, and sets a predetermined count initial value (for example, “100”) corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time reduction state. Set to the counter. When the big hit type buffer read value is “1”, a setting for starting the control to change the gaming state to the first certain variation state is performed. At this time, for example, the CPU 56 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to the on state. When the big hit type buffer read value is “2”, the setting for starting the control to change the gaming state to the normal state is performed. At this time, for example, the CPU 56 maintains both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag in the off state. When the big hit type buffer read value is “3”, a setting for starting the control to change the gaming state to the second certain variation state is performed. At this time, for example, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag to the on state, while maintaining the time reduction flag in the off state.

  After the setting in step S313, the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S314), and then the big hit end processing is terminated.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in step S16 of FIG. In this normal symbol process, the CPU 56 first checks whether the detection signal from the gate switch 32a provided in the gate 32 is in an on state, thereby detecting whether a game ball that has passed through the gate 32 has been detected. It is determined whether or not (step S131). When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the detection signal from the gate switch 32a is turned on (step S131; Yes), processing at the time of passing the gate is executed (step S132). On the other hand, when the detection signal from the gate switch 32a is in the off state (step S131; No), the process of step S132 is skipped.

  As an example of the process at the time of passing through the gate executed in step S132, the following process is executed. That is, first, whether or not the number of pending map storages, which is the number of pending data stored in the pending map storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 55, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). Determine whether. At this time, if the number of stored customary drawings is an upper limit value, the current game ball detection is invalidated and the process at the time of passing the gate is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the number of stored common charts is less than the upper limit value, for example, the CPU 56 determines the display of normal charts from numerical data updated by a random counter or the like provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR5 for use is extracted. Then, the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value MR5 is set as the hold data at the head of the empty entry in the usual hold storage unit. After the above-described processing at the time of passing the gate, or after it is determined in step S131 that the detection signal from the gate switch 13a is in the OFF state, the following processing is performed according to the value of the usual process flag. Each process of steps S140 to S144 is executed.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S140 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol game 10 is started by the normal symbol display 10 based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the normal symbol storage unit. At this time, for example, if there is pending data stored in the usual figure storage unit, the value of the ordinary process flag is updated to “1”.

  The normal symbol determination process in step S141 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol determination processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the normal symbol display result, the normal symbol display result determination table 130C shown in FIG. A determination is made as to whether or not the ordinary map display result as the variable display result is “per ordinary map” or “fusual map loss”. Here, in the common figure display result determination table 130C, when the gaming state is the first certain change state or the short time state, the common figure display result is “per common figure” as compared to the normal state or the second certain change state. The decision value to be compared with the random value MR5 is assigned to the usual display result so that the ratio of the decision to be made becomes high. As a result, in the first probability variation state and the short-time state, the base map display result is more likely to be “per base diagram” than in the normal state and the second probability variation state, and thus the second start formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 15. The winning opening 14 is likely to be in an expanded and open state, and the game ball is likely to enter (start winning prize) into the second starting winning opening 14.

  Further, in the normal symbol determination process, the universal symbol change time corresponding to the universal symbol display result is also determined. Here, in the common figure display result determination table 130 </ b> C, the normal figure change time is set to be shorter in the first certain variation state or the short time variation state than in the normal state or the second certain variation state. As a result, in the first probability variation state and the short time state, the interval for deriving and displaying the variable display result of the normal symbol in the ordinary game is shortened. The second starting prize opening 14 formed by the normally variable prize winning ball device 15 is easily expanded and opened, and the game ball easily enters the second starting prize opening 14 (start prize). In addition, in the general chart display result determination table 130C, the determination ratio of the normal chart change time is set to be different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the second probability variation state. Thereby, it can be suggested that the player can recognize whether the gaming state is the normal state or the second certain variation state from the usual fluctuation time to some extent.

  Further, in the normal symbol determination process, even when the normal symbol display result is “per normal symbol”, even if the tilt control time consisting of the opening time and the number of times of opening the second start winning opening 14 is set to the expanded open state is set. Good. Here, in the normal map display result determination table 130C, the opening time is longer and the number of opening times is larger in the first certain change state or the short time state than in the normal state or the second certain change state. Is set to Thereby, in the special game state such as the first certain change state or the short time state, the time for the second start winning opening 14 to be in the expanded open state becomes longer and the number of times of opening increases, so that the game ball becomes the second start winning opening 14. It becomes easy to enter (start prize). In addition, in the general chart display result determination table 130C, the determination ratio of the opening time and the number of times of opening is set to be different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the second certain variation state. Thereby, it can be suggested that the player can recognize to some extent whether the gaming state is the normal state or the second certain variation state from the combination of the opening time and the number of times of opening. The setting related to the tilt control may be performed in the normal symbol stop process in step S143 or the normal electric accessory operation process in step S144.

  The normal symbol variation process in step S142 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol variation process, a setting for varying the normal symbol in the regular symbol game by the normal symbol display 10 is performed. The normal symbol that changes based on these settings is displayed as a normal symbol display result that is a variable symbol display result of the normal symbol when the normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed. In the normal symbol variation process, the elapsed time from the start of variation of the normal symbol is measured. At this time, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the normal time fluctuation time. Then, when the usual figure change time is reached, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “3”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display 10 is set to stop and display the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol. Note that the setting for stopping and displaying the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is the normal symbol process flag value when the measured elapsed time reaches the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol variation process of step S142. It may be performed before updating to “3”. Further, in the normal symbol stop process, when the normal symbol display result is “per normal symbol”, for example, the solenoid 16 for the ordinary electric accessory connected to the movable wing piece included in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 15 is driven. After the setting for tilting control with the movable blade piece as the tilting position, such as the setting of the normal electric operation pattern, is performed, the value of the normal process flag is updated to “4”.

  In the case of setting the normal power operation pattern in the normal symbol stop process in step S143, the normal signal operation pattern is selected by selecting the normal power operation pattern corresponding to the general symbol display result determined in the normal symbol determination process in step S141. Different opening times and opening times may be set according to the display result. Alternatively, when the normal power operation pattern is set in step S142, it may be determined whether or not the time reduction flag is on, and the normal power operation pattern corresponding to the determination result may be set. In this case, when the normal symbol variable display is started, for example, the hourly flag is off corresponding to the big hit game state, etc., but when the normal symbol variable display result is stopped, the big hit game state When the hourly flag is turned on in response to the first probability change state or time-short state after the end of, the normal map display result was "per normal figure" in the first probability change state or time-short state Correspondingly, it is possible to set the opening time and the number of opening times of the second start winning opening 14. As a result, for example, even if the normal symbol variable display is started before the first certain change state or the short time state, the normal figure display result becomes “per normal figure” after the first certain change state or the short time state. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second start winning opening 14 with difficulty. If it is determined in the normal symbol stop process in step S143 that the usual figure display result is "ordinary figure loss", the ordinary figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to "0".

  The ordinary electric accessory actuating process in step S144 is executed when the value of the usual process flag is “4”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the movable wing piece provided in the ordinary variable winning ball device 15 is moved from the vertical position to the tilt position in response to the variable display result in the ordinary game being “per game”. Thus, setting of tilt control for changing the second start winning opening 14 from the normal open state to the expanded open state is performed. For example, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, a drive control signal for driving the solenoid 16 for the ordinary electric accessory is generated in accordance with the setting of the ordinary electric actuating pattern set in the ordinary symbol stopping process in step S143. Can be done. Further, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the elapsed time after the solenoid 16 for the ordinary electric accessory is driven and the second start winning opening 14 is in the expanded open state is measured, and the elapsed time is changed to the normal electric actuating pattern. It is determined whether or not the corresponding tilt control time (open time) has been reached. When the elapsed time reaches the tilt control time, the driving of the solenoid 16 for the ordinary electric accessory is stopped, and the movable blade piece is returned from the tilt position to the vertical position, so that the second start winning opening 14 is changed. Set to change from the expanded open state to the normal open state. When the number of times of tilting the second start winning opening 14 in the expanded open state reaches the number of open times corresponding to the normal operation pattern, the normal process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to “0”. That's fine.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 80 will be described. In the effect control board 80, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 101 in the effect control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 46 is executed. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 46 is started, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S401), clears the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100, and sets various initial values. Also, register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) mounted on the effect control board 80 is performed.

  Thereafter, the effect random number update process is executed (step S402), and various random values used for effect control are counted by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 of the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100. The numerical data indicating the random value to be updated is updated by software. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting.

  On the side of the production control board 80, an interrupt for receiving the production control command from the main board 31 is generated separately from the timer interruption that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 31 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 101 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 101 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, for example, among the input ports 103 shown in FIG. 5, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 31 via the relay board 77. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 of the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis process executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, an effect control process is executed (step S406). In this effect control process, for example, an effect operation using various effect devices such as an effect image display operation on the display screen of the effect display device 9, an audio output operation from the speaker 27, and a lighting operation in the frame LED 28 and the decoration LED 25 is performed. With respect to the control content, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 are performed.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the game state storage process executed in the command analysis process in step S405 shown in FIG. The game state storage process shown in FIG. 47 stores the game state indicated by the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 on the side of the effect control board 80, and the effect control CPU 101 and the like. Is a process that can be specified by

  In the gaming state storage process shown in FIG. 47, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received (step S451). At this time, if no gaming state designation command is received (step S451; No), the gaming state storing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a gaming state designation command is received (step S451; Yes), the second byte of EXT data in the gaming state designation command is extracted (step S452). Then, after the EXT data extracted in step S452 is stored in the game state buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 or the like (step S453), the game state storage process is terminated. In this way, it is possible to specify which of the plurality of types of gaming states of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is on the side of the effect control board 80 from the stored contents of the gaming state buffer by the processing of step S453.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S406 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 48, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of the following processes in steps S160 to S166 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Select and execute.

  The decorative symbol variation start waiting process in step S160 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In the decorative symbol variation start waiting process, the effect display device 9 depends on whether one of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 31. Variable display of decorative symbols in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R provided on the display screen, the first attached symbol display 9a, or the second attached symbol display This includes a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of attached symbols in 9b. At this time, if it is determined to start variable display, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this decorative symbol variation setting process, the start of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and the start of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. In order to perform various effects including variable display of decorative symbols and attached symbols, the final decorative symbols, temporary stop symbols, and pseudo Includes processing to determine patterns, presence / absence of notice effects, notice patterns, etc., and select and set one of multiple types of effect control patterns prepared in advance as usage patterns according to the decision result Yes. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative symbol variation process in step S162 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation processing, for example, various types of effect control patterns that are used patterns corresponding to the effect control process timer values that are stored in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 are used. The control data is read out, and various kinds of effect control during the variable display of the decorative design are performed. Then, in response to, for example, that the effect control process timer value has reached a predetermined variable display end value (for example, “0”) or that a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received. A final decorative symbol as a final stop symbol that is a variable display result of the symbol is displayed in a completely stopped state. If the effect control process timer value is set to the variable display end value and the fixed decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped state, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. Sometimes, without depending on the effect control command from the main board 31, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative pattern on the effect control board 80 side. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This decoration symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, if the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “big hit”, the value of the effect process flag is set to “4”. When the variable display result is “small hit”, the effect process flag value is updated to “5”. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the variable display result being “lost”.

  The big hit control effect process in step S164 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the effect processing during the big hit control, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Or by outputting sound number data to the sound output board 70 and outputting sound and sound effects from the speaker 27, and turning on / off / flashing the light emitters such as the frame LED 28 and the decoration LED 25 by signal output to the lamp driver board 35. A process of controlling various performance operations in the big hit gaming state, such as making a game, is included. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 31.

  The effect process during small hit control in step S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the effect processing during the small hit control, for example, various effect control patterns corresponding to the variable display result being “small hit” are set, and an effect image based on the set contents is displayed on the effect display device 9. Displaying on the screen, outputting sound and sound effects from the speaker 27 by outputting sound number data to the sound output board 70, turning on / off light emitters such as the frame LED 28 and the decoration LED 25 by outputting signals to the lamp driver board 35 Processing for controlling various effects in the small hit gaming state, such as turning off / flashing, is included. As an example, in the effect processing during small hit control in step S165, various effect control patterns CST2-1 and CRE1-1 shown in FIG. 34 are selected as effect control patterns to be sequentially used and read from the various effect control pattern tables 182. The production control process timer is set. Thereafter, various settings for controlling the rendering operation may be performed in accordance with the control data read from the rendering control pattern according to the rendering control process timer value. The effect operation executed by such setting may be an effect operation common to 2R big hit / small hit, which may be executed even when the big hit type is “2R uncertain change” or “2R probability change”. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process in step S166 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is set, and an effect image based on the setting content is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 In addition, sound and sound effects are output from the speaker 27 by outputting sound number data to the sound output board 70, and light emitters such as the frame LED 28 and the decoration LED 25 are turned on / off / flashing by signal output to the lamp driver board 35. Such a process of controlling various performance operations corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the end of the effect operation. At this time, for example, according to the transition example of the effect mode shown in FIG. 3, the effect mode corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state may be set.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start waiting process executed in step S160 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation start waiting process shown in FIG. 49, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not there is a variation start command transmitted from the main board 31, such as a first variation start command or a second variation start command. Is determined (step S501). At this time, if neither the first variation start command nor the second variation start command has been received (step S501; No), whether or not the demonstration display flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on. Is determined (step S502). The demonstration display flag is set to an on state when a process of step S506 described later is executed, and is cleared to an off state when any of the processes of steps S512 and S516 is executed. Become.

  When the demonstration display flag is off in step S502 (step S502; No), it is determined whether the demonstration display setting flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S503). . The demonstration display setting flag is turned on when a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted from the main board 31 is received or when a process of step S513 described later is executed. On the other hand, the demonstration display setting flag is cleared and turned off when one of the processes in steps S505 and S518 is executed. If the demonstration display setting flag is off in step S503 (step S503; No), the demonstration screen is displayed because the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not been received after the value of the production process flag is updated to “0”. The setting for performing is not performed, and the decorative symbol variation start waiting process is terminated.

  If the demonstration display setting flag is ON in step S503 (step S503; Yes), it is determined whether a predetermined demonstration display waiting time has elapsed (step S504). Here, the demonstration display waiting time is the completion of the variable display of the decorative symbol whose variable display result is “losing”, or the completion of the presentation operation to notify the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state Based on the above, it is a time set in advance as a standby time from the timing of receiving the customer waiting demo designation command transmitted from the main board 31 until the demonstration display device 9 starts displaying the demonstration screen by the demonstration image. Good. At this time, if the demonstration display waiting time has not elapsed (step S504; No), the decorative symbol variation start waiting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the demonstration display waiting time has elapsed (step S504; Yes), the demonstration display setting flag is cleared and turned off (step S505), while the demonstration display flag is displayed. Is set to the on state (step S506). Subsequently, setting for starting display of the demonstration screen is performed (step S507). As an example, the CPU 101 for effect control initializes the display on the effect display device 9 by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP 109. The effect control CPU 101 reads out a predetermined demonstration display effect control pattern from a ROM built in or externally attached to the effect control microcomputer 100, and uses it as a use pattern for controlling the effect operation during the demonstration screen display. set.

  When the demonstration display flag is ON in step S502 (step S502; Yes), after executing the process of step S507, a demonstration screen display command process is executed (step S509). In this demonstration screen display command process, the production control CPU 101 updates, for example, the production control process timer, and the control data corresponding to the updated production control process timer value from the demonstration display production control pattern set in step S507. (For example, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, etc.), various commands corresponding to the control data are created and transmitted to the VDP 109, the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, etc. Good.

  After executing the demonstration screen display command process in step S509, it is determined whether or not the demonstration display period has ended (step S510). At this time, if the demonstration display period has not ended (step S510; No), the decorative symbol variation start waiting process ends. On the other hand, when the demonstration display period ends (step S510; Yes), settings for ending the demonstration screen display are performed (step S511). As an example, the CPU 101 for effect control initializes the display on the effect display device 9 by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP 109. Further, the effect control CPU 101 may set a timer initial value corresponding to the demonstration display waiting time in the effect control process timer. At this time, the demo display flag is cleared and turned off (step S512), the demo display setting flag is set on (step S513), and the decorative symbol variation start waiting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S501 that a variation start command has been received (step S501; Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (step S514). At this time, if the demonstration display flag is on (step S514; Yes), a setting for terminating the demonstration screen display is performed (step S515). As an example, the effect control CPU 101 initializes the display on the effect display device 9 by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP 109 in the process of step S515, as in the process of step S511. On the other hand, in the process of step S515, unlike the process of step S511, it is not necessary to set the timer initial value corresponding to the demonstration display waiting time in the effect control process timer. At this time, the demonstration display flag is cleared and turned off (step S516).

  When the demonstration display flag is off in step S514 (step S514; No), after executing the process of step S516, it is determined whether the demonstration display setting flag is on (step S517). At this time, if the demo display setting flag is on (step S517; Yes), the demo display setting flag is cleared and turned off (step S518). When the demonstration display setting flag is off in step S517 (step S517; No), after executing the process of step S518, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation setting process “1”. ”(Step S519), the decorative symbol variation start waiting process is terminated.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation setting process executed in step S161 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the variable display result is “lost” by reading, for example, EXT data of the variable display result notification command (step S531). . At this time, if the variable display result is “losing” (step S531; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command, the designated variation pattern sets the variable display mode of the decorative symbol to “non-reach”. It is determined whether or not it is a non-reach fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case of "(step S532).

  If it is determined in step S532 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S532; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S533). As an example, in the process of step S533, first, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 21A is selected and set. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 21B is selected and set. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. At this time, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined which of a plurality of types. Thereafter, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 21C is selected and set. Subsequently, a random value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the extracted random number value SR1-3 and the left / right outcome type DC1-1, the final stop symbol determination table 160C is referred to determine a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3. In step S533, the accompanying symbol (left stop accompanying symbol) to be added to the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, and the accompanying symbol to be added to the decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 (left The combination (losing combination) of the stop accompanying symbol) and the decorative symbol (medium stopping accompanying symbol) that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined. Specifically, three accompanying symbols stored in the GDROM are extracted at random. Next, it is determined whether or not the selected accompanying symbol is a specific combination stored in a ROM built in or externally attached to the production control microcomputer 100. If it is a specific combination, the selection is performed again. And it repeats until the combination which is not a specific combination is extracted, and the obtained combination is determined as each stop accompanying symbol of right, left, and center. Alternatively, the stop accompanying symbol may be determined with reference to the loss accompanying symbol determination table for selecting the loss combination stored in the ROM. The loss accompanying symbol determination table may be a table that records a combination of a plurality of accompanying symbols (losing combinations) different from the specific combination and a ratio at which each loss combination is selected. In addition, the accompanying symbol accompanying the decorative symbol other than the stop decorative symbol may be determined at random.

  In this way, in the process of step S533, with reference to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the decorative symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined. Then, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols is either a reach combination, a jackpot combination, a pseudo-continuous chance item GC1 to GC8, a two-time release chance item TC1 to TC4, or a predetermined combination as shown in FIG. A non-reach combination can be prevented. Moreover, it can prevent that an accompanying symbol becomes a specific combination.

  If it is determined in step S532 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S532; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a reach-losing combination is determined (step S534). As an example, in the process of step S534, first, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 24A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the same decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 are displayed. decide. Next, a final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 24B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-3, the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, according to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, The symbol difference between the decorative symbol to be FZ2-2 and the decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined in this way, a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined.

  In this way, in the process of step S534, first, the “left” and “right” symbols other than the “medium” symbol display area 9C in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed last are used by using the final stop symbol determination table 162A. The decorative symbols for the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the display areas 9L and 9R are determined. Thereafter, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2-1 in the "medium" symbol display area 9C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. , The design difference with the decorative design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the decorative design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference. In step S534, in the same manner as in step S533, an accompanying symbol (left stop accompanying symbol) added to the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and a decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are added. A combination (loss combination) of the accompanying symbol (left stop accompanying symbol) and the decorative symbol (medium stop accompanying symbol) that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined.

  If the variable display result is other than “losing” in step S531 (step S531; No), a first mode transition setting process described later is executed (step S531a). In the first mode transition setting process, it is determined whether or not the rendering mode is set to mode K, mode J, or mode A. Next, it is determined whether or not it is a 15 round big hit where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R non-probable change” or “15R probable change” (step S535). At this time, if it is determined that it is not a big hit for 15 rounds (step S535; No), the case where the big display type is a big hit for 2 rounds where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R uncertain change” or “2R positive change” Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit”, the combination of the determined decorative symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is determined (step S536). As an example, in response to the case where any one of the fluctuation patterns PF1-1, PF1-2, PF1-5, and PF1-6 is designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, one of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 is selected. The combination of the finalized decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols to be configured is determined. In this case, the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 25C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbol FZ4-1 that becomes one of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4, A combination of FZ4-2 and FZ4-3 is determined as a confirmed decorative symbol. Further, when any one of the variation patterns PF1-3 and PF1-4 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, for example, the same processing as in step S534 is executed, so that the final stop symbol constituting the reach-miss combination is obtained. What is necessary is just to determine the combination of a fixed decoration design. In step S536, an accompanying symbol (left stop accompanying symbol) added to the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, and an accompanying symbol added to the decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 (left The combination (specific combination) of the stop accompanying symbol) and the decorative symbol (medium stopping accompanying symbol) that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined. Specifically, referring to a specific combination determination table stored in a ROM built in or attached to the production control microcomputer 100 as a combination of accompanying symbols stored in the GDROM, the right, left, and middle stop Extract accompanying symbols. The specific accompanying symbol determination table records a combination of a plurality of accompanying symbols (specific combinations) of common features (for example, a symbol indicating the same character, a symbol indicating a character of the same gender, etc.), and a ratio at which each specific combination is selected. Any table can be used. In addition, the accompanying symbol accompanying the decorative symbol other than the stop decorative symbol may be determined at random. When the variable display result is “small hit” and it is determined in step S531a that the effect mode is not shifted to mode A, in step S536, the final stop symbol and stop are performed in the same manner as in step S532 or S534. A combination of accompanying symbols is determined. That is, it is determined that the decorative symbol / accompanying symbol is stopped and displayed in the same combination as the case where the variable display result is lost.

  When it is determined in step S535 that it is a big hit of 15 rounds (step S535; Yes), as a use table for determining whether or not to execute a promotion effect during the big hit, the big hit shown in FIG. The middle promotion effect execution determination table 164B is selected and set (step S537). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR4-2 for determining the promotion of mid-hit promotion effect is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S538). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR4-2, the presence / absence of jackpot promotion is determined by referring to the jackpot promotion promotion execution determination table 164B (step S539).

  Following the processing in step S539, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S539 is “no promotion effect” that does not execute the jackpot promotion effect (step S540). At this time, if the determination result is “no promotion effect” (step S540; Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is “15R uncertain change” (step S541). When the big hit type is “15R probability variation” and not “15R non-probability variation” (step S541; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the probability variation jackpot combination is determined (step S541). S542). As an example, in the process of step S542, the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 25B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163B on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which become one of the probable big hit combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern. In step S542, as in step S536, an accompanying symbol (left stop accompanying symbol) added to the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and a decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are added. A combination (specific combination) of the accompanying symbol (left stop accompanying symbol) and the decorative symbol (medium stop accompanying symbol) that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined. Or the combination of a stop accompanying pattern may be determined at random.

  When it is a determination result of “with promotion effect” as “promotion success” or “promotion failure” at step S540 (step S540; No), or when the jackpot type is “15R uncertain change” at step S541 (Step S541; Yes), the combination of the definite decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the normal jackpot combination is determined (step S543). As an example, in the process of step S543, the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 25A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which are any of the normal jackpot combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern. In step S542, as in step S536, an accompanying symbol (left stop accompanying symbol) added to the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and a decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are added. A combination (specific combination) of the accompanying symbol (left stop accompanying symbol) and the decorative symbol (medium stop accompanying symbol) that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined. Or the combination of a stop accompanying pattern may be determined at random. In this way, when it is determined in step S540 that the jackpot promotion effect is executed, based on the determination result in step S543, the final stop symbol constituting the normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the decorative symbol, The derivation display of the final stop symbol that constitutes the probable big hit combination is prevented. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player or the like from feeling uncomfortable because the promotion effect during the big hit is executed even though the final stop symbol constituting the probability variation big hit combination is derived and displayed.

  In the first mode transition setting process executed in step S531 and the second mode transition setting process described later, the effect control CPU 101 stores the game history table stored in the RAM (FIGS. 54A to 54C). )), The presence / absence of mode transition and the production mode after execution of mode transition are determined. In the game history table, in correspondence with “history number”, “content” indicating whether a big hit, small hit, or mode transition without big hit or small hit has occurred, and the “content” The “effect mode” indicating the effect mode after the end of the displayed event and the “fluctuation count”, which is the number of changes in the decorative pattern in the effect mode, are managed. Here, the “history number” is updated every time one of the events of big hit, small hit, and mode transition without big hit and small hit (indicated as “mode shift” in the figure) occurs. The generated event is stored as “content” in association with “history number”. Further, the effect mode determined in the second mode transition setting process and the first mode transition setting process with the occurrence of the event is stored as the “effect mode”. The “number of fluctuations” is updated based on, for example, receiving a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 31.

  51 and 52 are flowcharts showing an example of the first mode transition setting process executed in step S531a of FIG. The first mode transition setting process is a process for transitioning the effect mode when the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. In the first mode transition setting process shown in FIG. 51, the effect control CPU 101 first reads the EXT data of the variable display result notification command, for example, and the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R”. It is determined whether or not it is “probable change” (step S721).

  At this time, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R probability change” (step S721; Yes), the decision to execute the mode shift to shift to the mode K after the big hit gaming state is completed. This is done (step S722). Thereafter, the first mode transition setting process ends.

  If the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is not “15R probability change” (step S721; No), whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R uncertain change”. Is determined (step S723).

  At this time, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “15R non-probable change” (step S723; Yes), the mode transition is executed to shift the effect mode to mode J after the big hit gaming state. A determination to this effect is made (step S724). Thereafter, the first mode transition setting process ends.

  When it is determined in step S723 that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is not “15R uncertain change” (step S723; No), for example, by reading the EXT data of the variable display result notification command Identify variable display results. Here, it is specified that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R probability change” or “2R non-change probability”, or the variable display result is “small hit”.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the variable display result identified in step S725 is “big hit” and the big hit type is “2R probability change” or “2R non-change probability”. At this time, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is either “2R probability change” or “2R non-change probability” (step S725; Yes), the effect mode is changed to mode A after the big hit gaming state. A determination is made to execute the mode transition to be performed (step S726). Thereafter, the first mode transition setting process ends.

  When it is determined in step S725 that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is neither “2R probability change” or “2R non-change probability” (step S723; No), the variable display result is “small”. It is specified that it is “hit”. As described above, when the 15R probability variation, 15 non-probability variation, 2R probability variation, 2R non-probability variation, and small hit are specified in steps S721, S723, and S725, the history number of the above-described game history table is updated, and the updated The identified event (15R probability change, 15 non-probability change, 2R probability change, 2R non-probability change, or small hit) is stored as “content” in association with the history number.

  If it is specified that the variable display result is “small hit”, it is determined in step S750 whether or not the effect mode before the small hit is mode N. At this time, the effect control CPU 101 can specify the effect mode before the small hit with reference to the game history table stored in the RAM. At this time, if it is determined that the effect mode before the small hit is not the mode N (step S750; No), it is determined that the mode transition for shifting the effect mode to the mode A is executed after the small hit gaming state is ended. Is performed (step S760). Thereafter, the first mode transition setting process ends.

  When it is determined in step S750 that the effect mode before the small hit is mode N (step S750; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 refers to the game history table and the effect mode before becoming mode N. (When mode N is continuous, it is determined whether or not the production mode before mode N continues is mode A triggered by a small hit (step S751). At this time, when it is determined that the effect mode before the mode N is not the mode A triggered by the small hit (step S751; No), the mode transition for shifting the effect mode to the mode A is executed. A determination to this effect is made (step S760). Thereafter, the first mode transition setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S751 that the presentation mode before mode N is mode A triggered by a small hit (step S751; YES), the mode to mode A triggered by a small hit is set. It is determined whether or not the total number of changes from the transition is 31 or more (step S752). At this time, when it is determined that the total number of changes from mode transition to mode A triggered by a small hit is not 31 or more in total (step S752; No), the first mode transition setting process is terminated. To do.

  If it is determined in step S752 that the total number of changes from the mode transition to mode A triggered by the small hit is 31 or more (step S752; Yes), the effect mode is switched on after the end of the small hit gaming state. A determination is made to execute the mode shift to shift to mode A (step S760). Thereafter, the first mode transition setting process ends. In this way, it is determined whether or not to shift the effect mode to mode A according to the game history when controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the first mode transition setting process, when the mode transition of the effect mode is determined in steps S722, S724, S726, and S760, the effect mode that becomes the transition destination is stored in the “effect mode” of the game history table. Then, after the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is finished, an effect control pattern table or a notice effect control pattern corresponding to the shifted effect mode is selected. That is, an effect control pattern table or a notice effect control pattern corresponding to the shifted effect mode is selected in the second mode transition setting process (described later) associated with the change after the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. .

  After performing any of the processes of steps S533, S534, S536, S542, and S543 in FIG. 50, the variable display effect setting process is performed (step S544). FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display effect setting process executed in step S544. In the variable display effect setting process shown in FIG. 51, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a change pattern (for example, change pattern PA1) in which the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command executes a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. -4, variation pattern PA2-2, variation pattern PA4-2, etc.) (step S601). If it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect (step S601; Yes), the pseudo-continuous temporary stop is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. Temporary stop display at the time of a chance eye stop that is temporarily stopped by a symbol or variable display effect of “slip after chance eye stop” (if it is any of the fluctuation pattern PA3-8, fluctuation pattern PA6-5, fluctuation pattern PF1-6) A stop symbol is determined (step S602).

  As an example, in the process of step S602, first, the number of executions of pseudo continuous variation in the variation pattern indicated in the received variation pattern designation command is set to a constant M. That is, if the number of executions (not including the initial fluctuation) of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous” is a single fluctuation pattern, the constant M is set to “1”, and the pseudo The constant M is set to “2” when the number of executions of the continuous variation is a variation pattern of two times, and the constant M is set to “3” when the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation is a variation pattern of three times. Set. Subsequently, “0” is set to a variable N indicating the number of combinations of temporarily stopped symbols that have been determined. When any one of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4, the fluctuation pattern PA3-8, the fluctuation pattern PA6-5, and the fluctuation pattern PF1-6 is designated, the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination shown in FIG. When the table 166A is selected as the usage table and a variation pattern other than these is designated, the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166B shown in FIG. 28B is selected as the usage table. Thereafter, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR3-1, by referring to any of the selected pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A, 166B, the left that becomes one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 The combination of the middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. At this time, the variable N is updated by adding 1, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M, the determination of the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is finished. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 selects the quasi-continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166C shown in FIG. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR3-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ3 that becomes one of the pseudo continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8. -1, KZ3-2 and KZ3-3 are determined. At this time, the variable N is updated by adding 1, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M, the determination of the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is finished. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 101 selects the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination table 166D shown in FIG. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR3-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR3-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ4 that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chance eyes GC1 to GC8. -1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 are determined. At this time, by updating the variable N by adding 1, the updated variable N matches the constant M, and thus the determination of the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is finished.

  Further, when any one of the fluctuation pattern PA3-8, the fluctuation pattern PA6-5, and the fluctuation pattern PF1-6 is designated, the pseudo continuous temporary stop determined using the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166A. The symbol may be set to be used also as a temporary stop symbol at the chance stop. Alternatively, the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is determined using the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166B, while the chance stoppage temporary stop symbol is determined using the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166A. You may make it do.

  If it is determined in step S601 that the variation pattern does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect (step S601; No), whether or not the variation pattern PA1-5 or variation pattern PF1-5 is designated. Is determined (step S603). Then, when the fluctuation pattern PA1-5 or the fluctuation pattern PF1-5 is designated (step S603; Yes), the temporary stop symbol at the chance eye stop may be determined (step S604). For example, in the process of step S604, the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as a use table, and numerical data indicating the random number SR3-1 for determining the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is extracted. Then, referring to the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 166A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR3-1, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ2- that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chance points GC1 to GC8 is obtained. The combination of 1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 may be determined as a temporary stop symbol at the chance eye stop.

  After one of the processes in steps S602 and S604 is executed, or when it is determined in step S603 that neither the variation pattern PA1-5 nor the variation pattern PF1-5 is present (step S603; No), re-lottery A re-lottery effect execution determination table 164A shown in FIG. 26A is selected and set as a use table for determining whether or not to execute an effect (step S605). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-1 for determining the redrawing effect execution is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S606). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-1, the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect is determined by referring to the re-lottery effect execution determination table 164A (step S607). In addition, when the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect is determined when determining the variation pattern, the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect may be specified from the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command.

  Following the processing in step S607, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S607 is “with re-lottery effect” such as “promotion success” or “promotion failure” (step S608). At this time, if the determination result is “with re-lottery effect” (step S608; Yes), the temporary stop symbol before re-lottery is determined as a decorative symbol to be displayed temporarily before executing the re-lottery effect ( Step S609).

  As an example, in the process of step S609, first, a temporary stop symbol determination table 165 before re-lottery shown in FIG. 27 is selected as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number SR2 for determining a temporary stop symbol before re-lottery is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the pre-lottery temporary stop symbol determination table 165 based on the extracted numerical data indicating the random value SR2, the left, middle and right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, KZ7- which are usually the big hit combinations The combination of 3 is determined. Note that the decoration pattern of the normal jackpot combination that is temporarily stopped before executing the re-lottery effect is determined based on the confirmed decoration pattern that becomes the final stop pattern determined in the processing of step S542 and step S543 shown in FIG. You may be made to do. For example, when the determined decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is determined in the process of step S543, the same decorative symbol as the determined decorative symbol may be determined as the temporary stop symbol before re-lottery. On the other hand, when the determined decorative symbol that is the probability variation jackpot combination is determined in the process of step S542, the decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped may be determined from any normal symbols, or the fixed decorative symbol may be determined. A normal symbol whose symbol number is different from the symbol by “1” may be determined as a decorative symbol for temporary stop display.

  In the case where the determination result is “no re-lottery effect” not executed in step S608 (step S608; No), after the process of step S609 is executed, the second mode transition setting process (step S610). ) And the notice effect setting process (step S611), the variable display effect setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the second mode transition setting process executed in step S610. In the second mode transition setting process shown in FIG. 55, the effect control CPU 101 first determines that the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the short time state, the first certain change state, and the first state based on, for example, the stored contents of the gaming state buffer. Which of the two probability variation states is specified (step S621). Further, for example, from the stored contents of the effect mode buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, it is specified whether the current effect mode is mode A, mode J, mode K, or mode N (step S622). . Here, the effect mode buffer only needs to be able to store the current effect mode in a identifiable manner by setting a stored value associated with the current effect mode.

  Following the process of step S622, it is determined whether or not the effect mode specified in step S622 is mode J (step S630). Here, as shown in FIG. 3, the mode J production mode corresponds to the short-time state (low probability high base state) after the end of the big hit gaming state based on the big hit type of “15R uncertain change”. This is a controlled production mode. Therefore, when the production mode is mode J (step S630; Yes), it is determined based on the gaming state specified in step S621 whether or not the short-time state has ended (step S631). At this time, if the time-saving state has ended (step S631; Yes), a determination is made to execute a mode transition for shifting the effect mode to the mode N (step S632). Then, the second mode transition setting process ends. On the other hand, if the time saving state has not ended in step S631 (step S631; No), the second mode transition setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S630 that the effect mode is not mode J (step S630; No), it is determined whether or not the effect mode is mode K (step S640). Here, as shown in FIG. 3, the effect mode of mode K is an effect mode that is controlled in response to the fact that the first winning change state is entered after the big hit gaming state based on the big hit type of “15R probability changing”. is there. Then, when the variable display result is continuously controlled to the first probability variation state (high probability high base state) until the variable display result is “big hit”, the mode transition is performed when variable display of the decorative symbols is started. There is no need. Therefore, when the production mode is mode K (step S640; Yes), the second mode transition setting process is terminated. If the first probability change state is set to end before the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the first probability change state ends based on the gaming state specified in step S621. It may be determined whether or not it has been completed, and if it has been completed, the mode transition to the mode N effect mode may be executed.

  When it is determined in step S640 that the effect mode is not mode K (step S640; No), it is determined whether or not the effect mode is mode N (step S650). When it is determined that the effect mode is mode N (step S650; Yes), the second mode transition setting process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S650 that the mode is not the mode N mode (step S650; No), the mode is mode A. At this time, referring to the game history table in step S660, the number of changes in the mode A (that is, the number of changes in the latest history number) is read, and it is determined whether or not the number of changes is 20 or more.

  When it is determined in step S660 that the number of changes in the mode A is not 20 or more (step S660; No), the second mode transition setting process is terminated. If it is determined in step S660 that the number of changes in the mode A is 20 or more (step S660; Yes), it is determined in step S661 whether or not the gaming state is a highly probable state. At this time, if it is not in a highly accurate state (step S661; No), it is determined that the mode transition for shifting the effect mode to the mode N is executed (step S662). Then, the second mode transition setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is in a highly reliable state in step S661 (step S661; Yes), the second mode transition setting process is terminated. Thus, when 20 fluctuations are reached after entering the mode A, the mode transition from the mode A to the mode N is executed, but the mode transition from the mode A to the mode N is not performed in the high-accuracy state. Mode A will continue.

  Here, the mode transition to the mode N determined in steps S632 and S662 is a mode transition not triggered by the small hit or big hit. Along with the mode transition, the history number of the above-described game history table is updated, the mode transition is stored as “content” in association with the updated history number, and mode N is stored as “effect mode”. become. In this embodiment, only when it is determined that the number of changes in the mode A is 20 or more (Yes in step S660), it is determined whether or not the state is highly accurate (step S661). However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, it is determined whether or not the state is highly accurate. Only when it is determined that the state is not highly accurate, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations in the mode A is 20 or more. (In other words, when the state is highly accurate, the determination in step S660 is not performed).

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect setting process executed in step S611 in FIG. In the notice effect setting processing shown in FIG. 56, the effect control CPU 101 first selects and sets the notice effect execution determination table 169 shown in FIG. 30 as a use table for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect. (Step S641). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR6-1 for notice execution determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S642). The presence / absence of the notice effect is determined by referring to the notice effect execution determination table 169 based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-1 (step S643). At this time, for example, the presence / absence of the notice effect is determined at a different determination ratio depending on whether the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command is “losing”, “small hit”, or “big hit”. .

  Following the processing in step S643, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S643 is “with notice effect” for executing the notice effect (step S644). At this time, if the determination result is “with a notice effect” (step S644; Yes), the notice pattern determination table 170 shown in FIG. 31 is set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of kinds of notice patterns. (Step S646). Furthermore, the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command is specified (step S647). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value SR6-2 for determining the notice pattern is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S648). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR6-2, the notice pattern is determined as any one of notice X, notice Y, or notice Z by referring to the notice pattern determination table 170 set in step S646. (Step S649).

  In the case where the determination result is “no advance notice effect” in which the notice effect is not executed in step S644 (step S644; No), or after the notice pattern is determined in step S649, the notice effect setting process is terminated. When the notice effect setting process is thus completed, the variable display effect setting process as shown in FIG. 53 is also ended.

  After executing the variable display effect setting process in step S544 shown in FIG. 50, a plurality of effect control patterns are determined in advance (step S545). At this time, the production control CPU 101 selects one of a plurality of symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 185, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, and the usage pattern. Set as. For example, in the second mode transition setting process, when it is determined that the mode N is selected or the mode transition to the mode N is determined, the effect control CPU 101 performs the mode N effect control pattern table 180F (FIG. 32 (A)) is selected. In the second mode transition setting process, when it is determined that the mode is J, K, or A, the effect control CPU 101 selects an effect control pattern table corresponding to the determined effect mode.

  Also, for example, one of the mode transition effect control patterns stored in the mode transition effect control pattern table 181 is selected corresponding to the effect mode after execution of the mode transition determined in the second mode transition setting process. Set as usage pattern. For example, in S632 and S662 of the second mode transition setting process, when the mode transition to the mode N is determined, the effect control CPU 101 selects the mode transition effect control pattern (MCN) for the transition to the mode N. And set it as a usage pattern.

  Further, in response to the notice pattern determined in step S649 shown in FIG. 56, one of a plurality of notice effect control patterns stored in the notice effect control pattern table 186 is selected and set as a use pattern. For example, in the second mode transition setting process, when it is determined that the mode N is selected or when the mode transition to the mode N is determined, the effect control CPU 101 selects the notice effect control pattern for mode N. . In the second mode transition setting process, when it is determined that the mode is J, K, or A, the effect control CPU 101 selects a notice effect control pattern corresponding to the determined effect mode.

  Following the process of step S545, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command (step S546). And the setting for starting the fluctuation | variation of the decoration symbol in the production | presentation display apparatus 9 is performed (step S547). At this time, for example, the display control command designated by the display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S545 is transmitted to the VDP 109, and the like is provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the process during the decorative symbol variation (step S548), and the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation process executed in step S162 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation process shown in FIG. 57, the effect control CPU 101 first updates the effect control process timer value (for example, 1 subtraction, for example) (step S561), and then effects the updated effect control process timer value. Compared with the production control process timer determination value indicated by the control pattern, it is determined whether or not any of the timer determination values is met (step S562). And if it does not correspond to any timer judgment value (step S562; No), the decorative symbol variation process is terminated.

  If the timer determination value matches with the timer determination value in step S562 (step S562; Yes), the effect control execution data (for example, display control data, voice control data, and the like) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value. The lamp control data, a part or all of the movable member control data) or the end code is read (step S563). Here, if the plurality of timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern in step S562 match the effect control process timer value, the plurality of stored timer determination values are associated with each other and stored. The effect control execution data may be read out in the process of step S563. Then, it is determined whether or not the end code has been read in step S563 (step S564). At this time, if it is determined that the code is not an end code (step S564; No), the control of the rendering operation according to the rendering control execution data read in step S563 is executed (step S565), and then the decorative design is performed. The process during change is terminated. For example, in the process of step S565, the display control command specified by the display control data is transmitted to the VDP 109, the command corresponding to the audio data specified by the audio control data is transmitted to the audio output board 70, Of the signal output specified by the lamp control data to the lamp driver board 35 and the transmission of the motor drive signal specified by the movable member data to the motor 86, a part or all of them are sequentially or in parallel. (If there is only one operation, it may be performed alone). Further, in the process of step S565, for example, operation detection control data included in a predetermined effect control pattern, such as the notice effect control pattern CYZ determined in step S545 shown in FIG. Based on this, effect control related to the player's operation on the operation unit 38 may be executed. More specifically, it is determined from the operation detection control data, the effect control process timer value, or the like whether or not it is an operation effective period for effectively detecting an operation on the operation unit 38. At this time, if the operation is valid, it is determined whether or not the player's operation on the operation unit 38 is detected based on the detection signal transmitted from the operation detection switch 38a. When an operation is detected, in order to execute an effect operation corresponding to the operation mode or the like, display control data or the like is read out from the effect control pattern, or various control boards and effect devices are used. It is sufficient to transmit a control command or the like. Further, when an operation on the operation unit 38 is detected during the operation effective period, the operation effective period may be terminated to invalidate the operation on the operation unit 38, and the operation on the operation unit 38 may be detected effectively. Thus, a further effect operation corresponding to the detected operation may be executed. Thus, based on the operation detection control data included in the effect control pattern, in the process of step S565, depending on whether or not an operation on the operation unit 38 is detected, control for executing a predetermined effect operation and control for not executing it. Any one of the above may be performed.

  If it is determined in step S564 that the code is an end code (step S564; Yes), for example, by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the effect control process timer, the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set. This is performed (step S566). Then, after updating the value of the effect process flag to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the process at the end of the decoration symbol variation (step S567), the process during the decoration symbol variation is terminated. When a decorative symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80, when it is determined in step S564 that it is an end code, “left”, “middle”, “right” In the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, for example, a temporary stop display is performed so as to display the fluctuation variation of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol stop command is received in the decorative symbol variation end process of step S163 shown in FIG. In response to this, it is only necessary to completely stop (final stop) the decorative symbol to which the stop accompanying symbol is attached.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation end process executed in step S163 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation end process shown in FIG. 58, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed (step S581). Here, the hit start designation command reception waiting time is the time set in the process of step S566 shown in FIG. If the hit start designation command reception waiting time has not elapsed in step S581 (step S581; No), it is determined whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 31 has been received (step S582). . At this time, if no hit start designation command is received (step S582; No), the decorative symbol variation end process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S582 that a hit start designation command has been received (step S582; Yes), the start of the big hit gaming state among the various effect control patterns stored in the various effect control pattern table 182 Is selected from among various effect control patterns CST1-1, various effect control patterns CST1-2, and various effect control patterns CST2-1 prepared for informing the user (step S583). At this time, for example, based on the jackpot type specified from the variable display result notification command or the determination result of the presence / absence of the jackpot promotion effect in the processing of steps S539 and S540 shown in FIG. 50, various effect control patterns CST1-1, It is only necessary to determine which of the effect control pattern CST1-2 and the various effect control patterns CST2-1 is to be used.

  Thereafter, for example, effect control execution data included in various effect control patterns selected in step S583 is read (step S584). Subsequently, the hit notification operation is controlled according to the effect control execution data read in step S584 (step S585). For example, in the process of step S585, the display control command specified by the display control data is transmitted to the VDP 109, the command corresponding to the audio data specified by the audio control data is transmitted to the audio output board 70, Of the signal output specified by the lamp control data to the lamp driver board 35 and the transmission of the motor drive signal specified by the movable member data to the motor 86, a part or all of them are sequentially or in parallel. (If there is only one operation, it may be performed alone). Thereby, by the display of the effect image on the display screen of the effect display device 9, the output operation of the sound and sound effect from the speaker 27, the lighting operation of the light emitters such as the frame LED 28 and the decoration LED 25, the moving operation of the movable member 78, etc. The variable display result becomes “big hit” or “small win”, and it can be notified that the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  When the process of step S585 is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during the big hit control (step S587), and then the decorative symbol variation end process ends. If it is determined in step S581 that the hit waiting time for receiving the start designation command has elapsed (step S581; No), the effect process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to “0” ( In step S588), the decorative symbol variation end process may be terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not to shift the effect mode to the mode A according to the game history when the small hit game state is controlled. Here, the action of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the game history will be described with a specific example.

  Reference is made to the game history table of FIG. 54A and the explanatory diagram of FIG. A small hit 1 is generated (history number 3), and the production mode is shifted to mode A with the occurrence of the small hit 1. Then, based on the fact that the number of fluctuations is 20 or more in this mode A, a transition to mode N is performed (history number 4). Then, a small hit 2 is generated at the fifteenth fluctuation after the transition to the mode N, and the effect mode is shifted to the mode A again (history number 5). In this example, when the small hit 2 occurs, the effect mode before the small hit 2 occurs is mode N (history 4). And the production mode before becoming mode N is mode A triggered by a small hit (history 3). However, since the total number of fluctuations after the transition to the mode A is 31 or more (35 fluctuations), the transition to the mode A is made again with the occurrence of the small hit 2.

  Next, the game history table in FIG. 54B and the explanatory diagram in FIG. 59B are referred to. A small hit 1 is generated (history number 3), and the production mode is shifted to mode A with the occurrence of the small hit 1. Then, based on the fact that the number of fluctuations is 20 or more in this mode A, a transition to mode N is performed (history number 4). Then, although the small hit 2 is generated at the eighth variation after the transition to the mode N, the effect mode remains the mode N (history number 5). In this example, when the small hit 2 occurs, the effect mode before the small hit 2 occurs is mode N (history 4). And the production mode before becoming mode N is mode A triggered by a small hit (history 3). Further, since the total number of fluctuations after the transition to the mode A is 30 or less (28 fluctuations), even if a small hit 2 occurs, the transition to the mode A is not performed.

  Next, the game history table of FIG. 54C and the explanatory diagram of FIG. In this example, the history is the same as in the example of FIGS. 54B and 59B up to the point of small hit 2. In this example, when the small hit 3 occurs, the effect mode before the small hit 3 occurs is mode N (history 5). Since the modes N are continuous in the histories 4 and 5, the production mode before the continuous mode N is the mode A triggered by the small hit (history 3). Since the total number of fluctuations since the transition to the mode A is 31 or more (38 fluctuations), the transition to the mode A is performed again even though the interval from the small hit 2 is short (history 6).

As described above, in this embodiment, the probability of occurrence of a small hit is set higher than the probability of occurrence of a 2R probability variable big hit, thereby facilitating the transition to mode A during the game and providing the player with a high probability. It is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing many opportunities to expect the state. However, even though the actual state is not high, frequently switching to the mode A may reduce the player's interest. In the present embodiment, when a small hit occurs, the game history table is referred to, and if it is 30 fluctuations or less after the mode shift to mode A triggered by the small hit, do not shift to mode A. Yes. That is, a small hit is generated immediately after the mode A triggered by the small hit and the mode N is reached, thereby preventing the player from shifting to the mode A, thereby suppressing the decrease in the player's interest. ing. Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the mode transition to the mode A is performed according to the game history, so that the effect of the mode A is enhanced. Further, since control such as changing the small hit probability is not required in order to suppress frequent mode transition to mode A, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect without increasing the control burden.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, an example of a screen displayed on the effect display device 9 when a bonus is generated will be described. In the example of FIG. 59A described above, when the small hit game state corresponding to the small hit 2 is entered, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the effect display device 9 have, for example, decorative symbols “ 1,3,5 "is displayed (D02), and mode transition to mode A is performed. In D02, the ornamental design “1” has an accompanying pattern “A”, the ornamental design “3” has an accompanying design “a”, and the ornamental design “5” has a different font from the character attached to the decorative design “1”. The accompanying symbol “A” is attached. Thus, by stopping and displaying a combination (specific combination) in which the accompanying symbols have a common point, it is suggested to the player to shift to the mode A. At this time, a girl character is displayed on the effect display device 9 together with the characters “Mode A rushing” (D03), and then the variation of the decorative design is started (D04). Here, the image display effect of D03 is executed as a part of the ending effect process of S166, for example. This image display effect may be executed based on the mode transition effect control pattern corresponding to the mode transition to mode A, and the two-time-release game end effect (image of D03) in various effect control pattern tables. There may be a plurality of display effects including and not including a display effect, which may be executed as a part of the display effect). The image display effect of D03 may be executed, for example, as part of the effect processing during the small hit control of S165 (the effect processing during the big hit control of S164 when a big hit occurs). It may be executed as part of the changing process (S162).

  On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 59 (B) described above, when the small hit game state related to the small hit 2 is entered, the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the effect display device 9 have, for example, decoration as a second chance of opening. The symbol “1, 6, 5” is displayed (D12). Further, the accompanying design “A” is attached to the decorative design “1”, the accompanying design “c” is attached to the decorative design “6”, and the accompanying design “D” is attached to the decorative design “5”. That is, when the mode transition to the mode A is not performed, unlike the case of the transition to the mode A, the decorative design and the accompanying design become a combination having no common point or law (lost combination) as in D12. In addition, the image display effect as shown in D03 is not executed, and the change of the decorative design is started without notifying that the mode A is not shifted to (A13). As described above, when the mode is not shifted to mode A, the next change is started without notifying that the mode is not shifted, thereby preventing the player from being discouraged from not shifting to mode A. In addition, the decorative symbol that is a small hit symbol that does not shift to mode A is not a chance symbol symbol, and a predetermined reach-losing combination in which an accompanying symbol is not a specific combination is also made. Recognize that it is a mere reach loss when the change starts. For this reason, it is possible to prevent discouragement from not shifting to the mode A despite the chance symbol.

  Here, since the screen corresponding to D03 is not displayed between D12 and D13, the period from the derivation display (D02, D12) of the decorative symbol indicating the small hit to the start of the next variation (D04, D13) is different. As a result, the time setting and time control of the gaming machine may be complicated. On the other hand, for example, if the decorative symbol is stopped for a predetermined period from the derivation display of the decorative symbol indicating the small hit like D12, the player may feel uncomfortable. In order to prevent this, for example, a pseudo decorative pattern variation display is performed as the display of the effect display device 9 between D12 and D13, and the period from D02 to D04 is matched with D12 to D13. You may do it.

[2. Pachinko machines according to the second embodiment]
Next, regarding the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, differences from the first embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment shifts to mode A depending on whether or not the gaming state when the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to the open state with a small hit is in a highly accurate state. It is determined whether or not to do.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, if the mode is the mode A production mode, the “fluctuation frequency” of the decorative symbols after the mode transition to the mode A is a predetermined number ( For example, it is determined whether or not it is 20) or more, and when it is determined that the number is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the mode is changed from mode A to mode N (FIG. 61A). Here, in the second embodiment, if the number of fluctuations is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the mode shifts from mode A to mode N regardless of whether or not the state is highly accurate. Therefore, even in the production mode of mode N, there are cases where the base is highly accurate and low, and there are cases where the base is highly accurate and low (FIG. 61B). For example, when 2R probability variation big hit occurs and the mode A effect mode is set, and when 20 fluctuations are ended and the mode N is reached, the state is a high probability low base state.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 62, in the second mode transition setting process in the second embodiment, when it is determined in step S660 that the number of changes in the mode A is 20 or more (step S660; Yes), a high accuracy is obtained. Regardless of whether or not it is a state, a determination is made to execute a mode transition for shifting the effect mode to the mode N (step S662). Then, the second mode transition setting process ends.

  FIG. 63 shows an example of the first mode transition setting process in the second embodiment. When it is determined in step S750 that the effect mode before the small hit is mode N (step S750; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming state is a highly probable state (step). S755). Here, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the high probability state (step S755; No), the first mode transition setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S755 that the gaming state is a highly probable state (step S755; Yes), a decision to execute a mode transition for shifting the effect mode to mode A after the end of the small hit gaming state. Is performed (step S760). Thereafter, the first mode transition setting process ends. In this way, it is determined whether or not to shift the effect mode to mode A according to the gaming state when controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the mode shifts to the mode N with 20 fluctuations after the mode shift to the mode A regardless of whether or not the state is the high-accuracy state. For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), when the mode is shifted to mode A with the occurrence of 2R probability variation big hit, the mode is shifted to mode N with 20 fluctuations. At this time, the base state is high and low. When a small hit occurs in this state, the mode shifts from mode N to mode A based on the high-accuracy state. Also, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), when the mode transition is made to mode A with the occurrence of 2R uncertain variation big hit, the mode transition is made to mode N with 20 fluctuations. At this time, the low probability and low base state is established. If a small hit occurs in this state, the mode is not shifted to mode A because it is not a highly accurate state. As in this embodiment, when the mode transitions from mode N to mode A, the player is expected to be in a highly accurate state by setting a high probability of being in the highly accurate state. I am trying to improve my interest in A. Further, since control such as changing the small hit probability is not required to suppress the mode transition to mode A, it is possible to enhance the effect without increasing the control burden.

[Modification of the present invention]
Finally, a modification of the present invention will be described.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the specific performance state is mode A has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of specific performance states may exist. For example, there are two modes of mode A and mode B as the specific performance state, and when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is set so that the probability that the rendering mode is mode A is high, and when the gaming state is not a high probability state It is preferable to set so that the probability that the mode becomes mode B is high. For example, when a 2R big hit or a small hit occurs, a lottery to determine which mode to switch to mode A or mode B may be performed based on a predetermined random number (for example, SR5). Further, at a predetermined timing (for example, every 8 fluctuations), a lottery for determining whether or not to perform mode transition from mode A to mode B or from mode B to mode A is performed based on a random number (for example, SR5). good. For example, in the case where the range of the random number SR5 is 1 to 200, when the probability change state is reached, if the SR5 is a value of 1 to 150, the transition destination production mode is the mode A, and if the SR5 is a value of 151 to 200. While the transition destination production mode is set to mode B, when the probability change state is not established, the transition destination production mode is set to mode A if SR5 is a value of 1 to 50, and the transition is performed if SR5 is a value of 51 to 200. It is preferable to set the previous production mode to mode B.

  By providing a plurality of specific performance states in this way, the ratio of the high-accuracy state when controlled to mode A is higher than the ratio of the high-accuracy state when controlled to mode B. The player can be expected to be in a highly accurate state when the production mode is mode A, and the interest in the game can be improved. On the other hand, when a mode transition is made from mode A, which is highly likely to be in the highly probable state, to mode B, which is unlikely to be in the highly probable state, the player's interest is reduced and the game is played. There is a possibility that it will end. On the other hand, 2R big hit or small hit occurs in a predetermined period after the mode transition from mode A to mode B (for example, a period in which the number of fluctuations after the mode transition to mode B ≦ 10). If this is the case, the probability of an effect mode that matches the gaming state controlled with this (whether or not it is a highly accurate state); It is preferable to increase the probability of shifting to mode B.

  For example, when a 2R big hit or a small hit occurs in a predetermined period after the mode transition from the mode A to the mode B is performed (for example, a period in which the number of fluctuations after the mode transition to the mode B ≦ 10). When the probability change state is reached, if SR5 is a value of 1 to 180, the transition destination production mode is mode A, and if SR5 is a value of 181 to 200, the transition destination presentation mode is mode B. When the state is not surely changed, it is preferable that the transition destination production mode is mode A if SR5 is a value of 1 to 20, and the transition destination production mode is mode B if SR5 is a value of 21 to 200. . By doing in this way, even when the mode transition to the mode B, which is unlikely to be a highly accurate state, is performed, the effect mode matches the gaming state by 2R big hit or small hit within a predetermined period. Thereby, the player can accurately grasp the gaming state with a high probability, and the game can be easily continued even when the player leaves the mode A.

  Here, the mode A and the mode B are production modes that suggest that they are in a highly accurate state. From the production modes (mode A or mode B) that suggest these highly accurate states, for example, they are highly accurate states. When the mode is shifted to the mode N, which is an effect mode that does not suggest that, the player's interest is greatly reduced, and the game is likely to end. On the other hand, in a predetermined period after the mode transition from mode A or mode B to mode N is performed (for example, a period in which the number of fluctuations after mode transition to mode N ≦ 10), 2R big hit or small When a hit occurs, the probability of a production mode that matches the gaming state controlled with it (whether or not it is a high probability state), that is, the mode A and the high probability state If not, the probability of shifting to mode N may be increased.

  In said 1st Embodiment, although it determined whether it transfers to mode A based on the frequency | count of change after shifting to the mode A triggered by the last small hit as a game history, not only this but last time Whether or not to shift to mode A may be determined based on the number of fluctuations from the big hit. For example, when the number of fluctuations from the previous big hit is a predetermined number or more, the mode shifts to mode A, and when it is less than the predetermined number, the mode shift to mode A may be prevented. Note that it may be determined whether or not to shift to the mode A based on the number of fluctuations from the previous 15R big hit, that is, the big hit with substantial play.

  In addition, when the big hits that occur during the special gaming state continue for a predetermined number of times, or when a so-called predetermined number of times (for example, three or more times) occur, a predetermined period (for example, 100 after the special gaming state ends). Fluctuation), the mode may not be shifted to the mode A triggered by the small hit. In this way, a jackpot type or the like other than the number of changes may be used as the game history.

  In addition, for the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B, data indicating that the variable display of the corresponding special symbol or decorative design is held, etc. Based on this, the presence / absence of mode transition and the notice effect may be determined. As an example, in the main board 31, the CPU 56 extracted in step S 219 shown in FIG. 39 at the time of starting winning when the entry of the game ball was detected at either the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. Based on the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, referring to the first special figure display result determining table 130A or the second special figure display result determining table 130B as appropriate, the variable display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, Specify whether it will be “lost”. Then, a start winning designation command for designating the specified variable display result is transmitted to the effect control board 80. The start winning designation command may be an effect control command in which different EXT data is set according to the variable display result, for example. When the start control designation command is received, the effect control board 80 stores the hold data that can specify the variable display result indicated by the start win specification command. After that, for example, when variable display of decorative symbols is started, if there are a plurality of reserved data stored, whether or not there is a mode transition during two subsequent variable displays, a transition effect mode or a notice What is necessary is just to determine a production. More specifically, when it is determined that the mode transition is executed with the variable display corresponding to the third hold data, the notice effect executed with the variable display corresponding to the second hold data is changed to the effect mode to be transferred. Alternatively, it may be determined as one of a plurality of types of notice effects at different determination ratios depending on the game state or the like.

  In the second embodiment described above, the example in which it is determined whether or not the mode transition to the mode A is determined based on whether or not the gaming state is the high probability state is not limited to this. It may be determined whether or not to enter the mode A based on whether or not there is.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the mode transition is determined at the timing when the decorative symbol variable display is started (variable display effect setting processing) has been described. After the start, it may be executed within a predetermined period until the final stop symbol that becomes the variable display result is stopped and displayed. Or after the last stop symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be executed within a predetermined period until the next variable display is started.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which it is determined whether or not to shift to the mode A based on the gaming history and the gaming state has been described, but the probability of shifting to the mode A based on the gaming history and the gaming state is made different. It may be. That is, in step S752 of FIG. 52, when the game history satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 30 variations or less from mode A transition triggered by a small hit), the probability of transition to mode A is set to 80%, When the game history does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the probability of shifting to mode A is preferably 20%. Further, in step S755 of FIG. 63, when the gaming state becomes a predetermined state (for example, a high probability state), the probability of shifting to mode A is set to 80%, while the gaming state does not become the predetermined state. The probability of transition to mode A is preferably 20%. At this time, in FIG. 10, since the probability of being a small hit is set higher than the probability of being a 2R big hit, the probability of shifting to the mode A for the variable display of one special figure is shown in step S752 in FIG. By changing the decision probability in step S755 of FIG. 63, it is possible to set so as to vary greatly according to the game history / game state. In other words, a sharp effect can be executed without executing a heavy processing such as using a plurality of special figure display result determination tables, so the degree of freedom of setting is high.

  In the above-described embodiment, the small hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, and the game state is not changed after the small hit game state ends. On the other hand, after the end of the two round big hit state based on the variable display result “big hit” and the big hit type “2R uncertain change”, it is controlled to the normal state, and the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type. In the above description, it is assumed that after the end of the two-round big hit state based on the fact that “2R probability change” is set, the second probability change state is controlled. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the case where the jackpot type is “2R probability change”, the case where the jackpot type is “2R non-changeable” and the variable display result is “small hit”. Only one of them may be provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, the mode shifts from mode K to mode A without going through mode J (not 15R non-probable big hit), and the high base state is continued from mode K. If it is, it is possible to specify that the mode A is controlled to the high-accuracy state, and the mode is transferred from the mode J to the mode A without going through the mode K (not 15R probability variation big hit). If the high base state is continued from mode J, it can be specified that the mode A is not controlled to the high accuracy state. On the other hand, it is preferable not to perform mode transition from mode K to another mode and mode transition from mode J to another mode during the high base state. This makes it difficult to determine whether or not the player is controlled in a highly accurate state.

  In the above embodiment, the presence / absence of mode transition from mode N to mode A is determined based on the game history (the number of changes from the mode A transition due to the previous small hit) or the gaming state (whether or not the state is highly accurate) Although the example to determine was demonstrated, you may make it determine the presence or absence of the mode transfer from mode N to mode A based on both a game log | history and a game state. For example, when the mode transition is made to the mode A based on the 2R probability variation big hit, and then the mode transition is made from the mode A to the mode N based on the fact that the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20), the mode N (high When a small hit occurs in the certain state, the mode may be shifted to the mode A. At this time, the presence / absence of the mode change is determined based on the gaming state (whether or not the state is high probability) and the number of changes (the number of changes after the mode change to the previous mode A).

  In the above embodiment, after the mode transition from mode A to mode N, an example in which the mode transition from mode N to mode A is not performed unless 2R big hit or small hit occurs has been described. In a state of N, a lottery of whether or not to shift to mode A may be performed in a predetermined period (for example, every 10 changes), and control to shift from mode N to mode A may be performed based on the lottery result. .

  In the above embodiment, the transition ratio to the mode A may be made different depending on which display result of the first special figure or the second special figure is a small hit symbol. For example, when the display result of the first special figure is a small hit symbol, the probability of mode transition from mode N to mode A is increased, and the display result of the second special figure is a small bonus symbol. In some cases, control may be performed so as to reduce the probability of mode transition from mode N to mode A. In this case, the rate of mode transition is made different based on the game history of whether it is a small hit in the first special figure or a small hit in the second special figure.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the transition ratio to the mode A may be varied depending on whether the gaming state is based on the display result of the first special figure or the second special figure. For example, when the high accuracy state is obtained based on the display result of the first special figure, the probability of mode transition from mode N to mode A is increased, and the high accuracy state is obtained based on the display result of the second special figure. In some cases, control may be performed so as to reduce the probability of mode transition from mode N to mode A.

  In the first embodiment described above, an example in which it is determined whether or not to shift to the mode A based on the contents of the game history table has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to provide a counter for counting the number of fluctuations since then, and to determine whether or not to shift to mode A based on the value of the counter when a small hit occurs.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is changed to the open state for the predetermined period twice in the 2R probability variation big hit and the small hit has been described, but the number of times to change to the open state is not limited to two. For example, it may be once.

1 ... Pachinko machine 8a ... 1st special symbol display / E
8b ... 2nd special symbol display 9 ... Production display device 10 ... Normal symbol display 13 ... 1st start winning port 14 ... 2nd starting winning port 15 ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 20 ... Special variable winning ball device 25 ... Decoration LED
27 ... Speaker 28 ... Frame LED
31 ... Main board (game control board)
35 ... Lamp driver board 38 ... Operation button 38a ... Operation detection switch 56 ... CPU
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 70 ... Voice output board 77 ... Relay board 78 ... Movable member 80 ... Production control board 100 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Production control CPU
109… VDP
560 ... Game control microcomputer

Claims (2)

Variable display that derives and displays a display result after starting variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, with any one of a plurality of types of accompanying information added to at least some types When the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the device becomes a predetermined specific display result, the state can be changed between a first state advantageous to the player and a second state unfavorable to the player A gaming machine for changing a variable winning means to the first state,
First gaming state control means for controlling the variable winning means to a first gaming state for performing a predetermined number of times to change to the first state for a predetermined period;
After executing the second gaming state in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state in at least one of a period shorter than the predetermined period and the number of times less than the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is variably displayed more than the normal state. A second gaming state control means for controlling to a high probability state with an improved probability that the display result of the above will be the specific display result;
After executing the third gaming state in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state at least one of a period shorter than the predetermined period and the number of times less than the predetermined number of times , the variable winning means is changed to the first state. A third gaming state control means for maintaining the previous gaming state;
Deciding whether to control to the first gaming state, whether to control to the second gaming state, and whether to control to the third gaming state before deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display Pre-determining means to
When the pre-determining means determines to control to the second gaming state or the third gaming state, a display result in which the accompanying information added to the identification information is a specific combination is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display Derived display control means capable of performing control
Production state control means for controlling to a specific production state that is the same production mode after being controlled to the second gaming state and after being controlled to the third gaming state,
After the effect state control means is controlled to the third game state when not controlled to the specific effect state, the effect state control means may or may not control the specific effect state, and the third game Ri ratio is controlled to the specific effect state in response to the game history Do different when conditions are controlled,
The derivation display control means is a case where the pre-decision means decides to control to the third gaming state, and when not controlling to the specific effect state, the accompanying information added to the identification information becomes a specific combination. A gaming machine characterized in that a display result different from the display result is derived and displayed . Variable display that derives and displays a display result after starting variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, with any one of a plurality of types of accompanying information added to at least some types When the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the device becomes a predetermined specific display result, the state can be changed between a first state advantageous to the player and a second state unfavorable to the player A gaming machine for changing a variable winning means to the first state,
First gaming state control means for controlling the variable winning means to a first gaming state for performing a predetermined number of times to change to the first state for a predetermined period;
After executing the second gaming state in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state in at least one of a period shorter than the predetermined period and the number of times less than the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is variably displayed more than the normal state. A second gaming state control means for controlling to a high probability state with an improved probability that the display result of the above will be the specific display result;
After executing the third gaming state in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state at least one of a period shorter than the predetermined period and the number of times less than the predetermined number of times , the variable winning means is changed to the first state. A third gaming state control means for maintaining the previous gaming state;
Deciding whether to control to the first gaming state, whether to control to the second gaming state, and whether to control to the third gaming state before deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display Pre-determining means to
When the pre-determining means determines to control to the second gaming state or the third gaming state, a display result in which the accompanying information added to the identification information is a specific combination is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display Derived display control means capable of performing control
Production state control means for controlling to a specific production state that is the same production mode after being controlled to the second gaming state and after being controlled to the third gaming state,
After the effect state control means is controlled to the third game state when not controlled to the specific effect state, the effect state control means may or may not control the specific effect state, and the third game Ri ratio is controlled to the specific effect state in response to game state Do different when conditions are controlled,
The derivation display control means is a case where the pre-decision means decides to control to the third gaming state, and when not controlling to the specific effect state, the accompanying information added to the identification information becomes a specific combination. A gaming machine characterized in that a display result different from the display result is derived and displayed .

Images